Microsoft® MS-DOS®

3.3 Reference
HP 9000 Series 300/800 Computers

HP Part Number 98870-90050

Flin- HEWLETT
~~ PACKARD

Hewlett-Packard Company
3404 East Harmony Road, Fort Collins, Colorado 80525
 NOTICE
The information contained In this document is subject to change without notice

HEWLETT-PACKARD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL. INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable
for errors contained herein or direct. indirect. special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance,
or use of this material

WARRANTY
A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your Hewlett-Packard product and replacement parts can be obtained from your local
Sales and Service Office

MS -DOS is a US registered trademark of Microsoft, Incorporated.

LOTUS and 1-2-3 are registered trademarks of LOTUS Development Corporation.

Copynght 1988. 1989 Hewlett-Packard Company

This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be
photocopied. reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett-Packard Company. The information
contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Restricted Rights Legend

Use. duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in paragraph (b)(3)(B) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Software clause in DAR 7-104.9(a).

Use of this manual and flexible disc(s) or tape cartridge(s) supplied for this pack is restricted to this product only. Additional copies of the programs
can be made for security and back-up purposes only. Resale of the programs in their present form or with alterations, is expressly prohibited.

Copyright 1980, 1984, AT&T. Inc.

Copynght 1979. 1980. 1983, The Regents of the University of California

ThiS software and documentation is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley Software Distribution under license from the Regents of the University
of California

ii
Printing History
New editions of this manual will incorporate all material updated since the previous
edition. Update packages may be issued between editions and contain replacement and
additional pages to be merged into the manual by the user. Each updated page will be
indicated by a revision date at the bottom of the page. A vertical bar in the margin
indicates the changes on each page. Note that pages which are rearranged due to changes
on a previous page are not considered revised.

The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The printing
date changes when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and updates which are
incorporated at reprint do not cause the date to change.) The manual part number
changes when extensive technical changes are incorporated.

October 1988 ... Edition 1

September 1989 ... Edition 2

Printing History iii

iv Printing History
Contents

1. Using Reference Information

Contents of Subsequent Chapters and Appendices 1-2
Running DOS Commands . . . 1-3
The DOS Prompt and Cursor 1-4
The Parts of a DOS Command 1-5
Command Name . . . . . 1-5
Drives and Disks . . . . . 1-5
Devices and Device Drivers 1-.5
Paths . . . . . 1-6
Absolute paths 1-6
Relative paths 1-6
Directories. . . 1-7
Files . . . . . 1-8
Reserved Characters 1-8
Reserved File Names and Extensions 1-8
Wildcard Characters . . . . . 1-10
Parameters and Options (Switches) 1-11
Parameters . . . . . . . 1-11
Options (Switches) . . . . 1-11
Using the Parts in a Command. 1-12
Using Symbols in Commands 1-14
Using Internal and External Commands 1-15
Running External Commands With A Flexible Disk
Drive and A Hard Disk Drive 1-16
Running a DOS Command . . . . . . . . . 1-17

2. MS-DOS Commands
APPEND 2-2
ASSIGN 2-4

Contents-1
 ATTRIB 2-6
BACKUP 2-8
BREAK. 2-14
CHCP 2-16
CHDIR or CD 2-18
CHKDSK . . 2-20
CLS . . . . 2-22
COMMAND . 2-24
COMP 2-26
COpy 2-28
CTTY 2-32
DATE 2-34
DEL . 2-36
DIR . 2-38
DISKCOMP 2-40
DISKCOPY 2-42
DOS~10UNT 2-44
DOS2UX 2-48
ERASE . 2-50
EXE2BIN 2-52
EXIT. . 2-54
FASTO PEN 2-56
FC . . 2-58
FDISK . 2-62
FIND. . 2-64
FORMAT 2-66
FOR150 . 2-70
GRAFTABL . 2-72
GRAPHICS 2-74
JOIN . 2-78
KEYB 2-80
LABEL 2-84
MKD IR or MD 2-86
MOD E (General Information and Errors) 2-88
MODE (Set Parallel Printer) . . . . . 2-90
MODE (Set Display Adapter/Display Characteristics) 2-92
MODE (Set Asynchronous Comlnunications) . 2-94
MODE (Redirect Printing: Parallel to Serial) . . . . 2-96

Contents-2
 MODE (Prepare Code Page for Use) . . . . 2-98
~10DE (Select Code Page for Use) . . . . . 2-102
MODE (Reestablish the Current Code Page) . 2-104
MODE (Display Code Page Status) 2-106
MORE . . 2-108
tvl0USE . . 2-110
NLSFUNC 2-112
PAMCODE 2-114
PATH 2-116
PRINT . . 2-118
PROMPT. 2-122
RECOVER 2-124
REDIR . . 2-128
RENAME or REN 2-130
REPLACE 2-132
RESTORE 2-136
RMDIR or RD 2-140
SELECT 2-142
SET . 2-144
SIZE . 2-146
SORT. 2-148
SUBST 2-150
SYS 2-152
TIME. 2-154
TREE 2-156
TYPE 2-158
UX2DOS 2-160
VER . . 2-162
VERIFY 2-164
VOL . 2-166
XDIR . . 2-168

3. Batch File Command Reference

Batch Files . . . . . . 3-2
Creating a Batch File . . . 3-2
Executing a Batch File . . 3-2
Preventing Command Line Echoing . 3-2
Using Positional Parameters ~k'O - %9 3-3

Contents-3
 Using the SET Command 3-4
Batch File Conlmands 3-6
ECHO 3-6
FOR. 3-8
GOTO 3-10
IF 3-11
PAUSE 3-12
REM. 3-13
SHIFT 3-14

4. EDLIN Command Reference

Information Common To All EDLIN Commands 4-3
EDLIN Hints . . . . . . 4-5
EDLIN Syntax . . . . . . 4-6
ED LIN Command Options 4-7
EDLIN Commands . . 4-8
The Append Conlmand 4-9
The Copy Command . 4-10
The Delete Command . 4-13
The Edit Command 4-16
The End Command. . 4-18
The Insert Command 4-19
The List Command . 4-21
The Move COlnmand 4-24
The Page Command 4-25
The Quit Command 4-26
The Replace Command 4-27
The Search Command 4-30
The Transfer Command 4-33
The Write Command . 4-34

5. DEBUG Command Reference

Entering DEBUG COlnlnands 5-2
DEBUG Command Parameters 5-3
Memory Addressing on the HP Series 300 DOS Coprocessor 5-6
How to Start DEBUG 5-8
DEBUG Comlnands 5-10
The Assemble COlnlnand 5-11

Contents-4
 The COInpare Command 5-13
The Dump Command 5-14
The Enter Comnland 5-16
The Fill COIllInand 5-18
The Go Command . 5-19
The Hex Command . 5-21
The Input Command 5-22
The Load Command 5-23
The Move Command 5-25
The Name COllunand 5-26
The Output Command 5-29
The Procedure Command 5-30
The Quit Command 5-31
The Register Comrnand 5-32
The Search Command 5-35
The Trace Command . 5-36
The U nasselnble Command 5-38
The Write Command 5-40

6. MS-LINK Reference
What MS-LINK is and What it Does 6-2
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
How MS- LINK COlnbines and Arranges Segments 6-6
Files that NIS-LINK Uses 6-9
Input Files . . . . . 6-10
Output Files . . . . . 6-10
Virtual Memory File (VM.TMP File) 6-11
Running ~1S- LINK . . . . . . . 6-11
Working \Vith MS-LINK 6-12
Using the Text-Prompt Nlethod 6-13
Using the Command-Line Method 6-13
Using the Response-File N1ethod 6-15
Creating a Response File 6-16
Command Prompts . . . . . . 6-17
Object Modules [.OB.1]: . . . 6-18
Run File [First-Object-filename.EXE]: 6-19
List File [NUL.N1AP]: 6-19
Lihraries [.LIB]: 6-20

Contents-5
 Command Characters 6-21
The Plus-Sign 6-21
The Semicolon . 6-22
CTRL-C 6-22
Optional Switches 6-23
The /DSALLOCATE Switch . 6-25
The /HICH Switch . . . . . 6-25
The /LINENUMBERS Switch 6-26
The /MAP Switch . . . . . 6-26
The /PAUSE Switch . . . . 6-28
The /STACK:<number> Switch 6-28
MS-LINK Examples 6-29
MS-LINK Error Messages . . . . . 6-39

A. DOS Message Directory

Disc and Device Errors A-2
DOS Command Messages A-3

B. Configuration Command Reference

Overview B-1
ANSI.SYS . B-2
BREAK . . B-3
BUFFERS B-4
COUNTRY B-6
DEVICE B-8
FCBS . . . B-9
FILES B-11
LASTDRIVE B-12
PEMM.SYS B-13
SHELL . . B-15
VDISK.SYS B-16

Contents-6
 1
Using Reference Information
This manual contains information about MS-DOS (DOS) commands, utilities,
and facilities. The table shows how the manual can help you.

What You Want To Do Where To Get Information

You want to use a DOS Chapters 1 and 2 (and Appendix C) provide

command information about applicability, purpose, syntax,
examples, and use. Appendix A explains error
recovery.
You want to customize your Chapter 3 and Appendix B discuss commands
system. related to these tasks. Using this information,
and the information in your user's guide, you can
tailor a system to your specific needs.
As an expert, you want to use Chapters 3 through 6 provide information about
batch and object files these areas.

To provide information about using the manual, this chapter:

Describes the contents of the manual by chapters.

Explains the syntax and symbols used to document commands.

Discusses internal and external MS-DOS commands.
Defines often used terms.

Discusses compatibility among versions of MS-DOS.

Using Reference Information 1-1

Contents of Subsequent Chapters and Appendices
Except for reading Chapter 1 first, you can read chapters according to your needs.

Ch/Ap Name Description

2 MS-DOS 3.3 Contains an alphabetical list of all DOS commands.

Commands
3 Batch File Describes how to use a batch file and explains the
Commands subcommands available in BATCH.
4 EDLIN Describes how to use EDLIN (a line editor) and
Commands explains how to use its commands.
5 DEBUG Describes how to use the facility called DEBUG, which
Commands helps you debug binary and executable object files.
6 MS-LINK Describes how to use the utility called MS-LINK,
which links modules of 80286 object code to one load
module (an .EXE file).
A DOS Messages Lists and describes the error messages commonly
displayed by DOS commands.
B Configuration Contains information about the commands used to
Commands configure DOS.

1-2 Using Reference Information

Running DOS Commands
The reference' material for DOS assumes you understand certain terms. This
section describes commonly used terminology, DOS prompts, command syntax,
error messages, and so on.

Using Reference Information 1-3

The DOS Prompt and Cursor
The DOS interface (prompt) is: a letter designating the current drive; an open
angle bracket (»; and a blinking cursor (underscore). For drive C, you will
probably see:
C: \> _ or perhaps just C>_
While the DOS interface is crude, it does give you some information.
• The letter indicates the current disk drive (the drive having the disk on
which DOS looks for files unless you specify otherwise). The letters used
to label disk drives include:
A. The main flexible disk drive. Used primarily for initially
starting up DOS, copying applications to a hard disk, or holding
disks having data or libraries. After installing and configuring
DOS, most people leave drive A empty and have DOS start up
from drive C.
B A secondary flexible disk drive typically used for a data disk.
(Your system may not have this disk.)
C The hard disk having the primary (or only) partition. Used for
myriad purposes. It typically contains a root directory and the
subdirectories used by DOS, applications, and yourself.
D to Z On a hard disk, the extended partition (if it exists) can contain
up to 23 logical drives, which are labeled from D through Z.
Many people set up drive D, and perhaps E.
• The > implies that a command is echoed on the line as you type.
• The cursor (the underscore or box) shows the location where typed letters
are inserted (displayed).
The important thing about the prompt is: you cannot run a DOS command fronl
the keyboard unless you see the prompt somewhere on the display with the cursor
sitting next to it.

1-4 Using Reference Information

The Parts of a DOS Command
To run (execute, issue, or enter) a DOS command, you always type the name
of the command; and you may specify additional parts such as drives, paths,
file names, extensions, parameters, and options (switches). In addition, a
conllnand can require a specific use of punctuation. Accommodating this assumes
considerable knowledge on your part. The next several subsections discuss the
parts of a DOS command.

Command Name
You always use a comrnand name. The nanleS always appear in all capital letters
in the documentation, but you can type them in any combination of upper- and
lower-case letters. Most people type all parts of a DOS command, including the
command name, in lower-case letters.

Drives and Disks

A disk drive is a device that contains a disk that has the media on which you store
directories and files. The drives used in a DOS system can have different disks.
It gets redundant to keep specifying micro-flexible disk, flexible disk, hard disk,
partition on a disk, and so on unless the context warrants making a distinction.
Therefore, the reference manual talks about "disks" and makes distinctions when
necessary.
The various drives used in a DOS system can have capacities varying from 360
Kbytes to many lVlbytes. The reference material assmnes you know the capacities
of your drives and disks. The nlaterial also assumes you match the capacities of
your drives and disks, and it assumes you know when you can mismatch them.
Whatever the type of drive and disk, you specify the drive (and therefore the
disk) by entering a letter and colon (for example, A: specifies drive A and the
disk it contains). Consequently, the reference material does not repeatedly say:
"The disk in the drive that .... " The reference material simply says: '~Drive A" ,
and so on.

Devices and Device Drivers

The term has several connotations. Devices can be physical hardware such
as a printer; and in some cases, a device can be an interface card such as an
asynchronous cornmunications card.

Using Reference Information 1-5

A device will have a device driver; a special type of software that facilitates
comrnunication between the device and the computer system.
Devices can have names such as PRN, CON:, and LPTl (the colon can be
optional or required) .. Some commands require specification of the name of a
device or device driver.

Paths
A path is a series of directories connected by backslashes that leads to a file.
An initial backslash indicates the root directory. A backslash connects the last
directory in a path with a file when you specify a path and file name. A path,
including all backslashes, can contain 63 characters. A path cannot have any
spaces. You can use two types of paths.
Absolute paths. start with a backslash, moving from the root directory to a
file. Consider the following example:

\ utif\ tools\ locaf\ wrench The \utif\tools\local is the absolute path to the
file named wrench on the disk in the current
drive.

Relative paths. do not start with a backslash, moving to a file from the current
directory. Consider the following example:

tools\locaf\ wrenches The tools\ local is a relative path to the file

named wrenches from the current directory,
which is util in the above example that shows an
absolute path ..

1-6 Using Reference Information

Directories
Directories contain files. Directories have names, but do not have extensions.
A directory name contains one to eight characters (for example, \, tools, ltrs,
reports, my_12B, and so on). A directory name can be any combination of upper-
and lower-case letters because DOS does not make distinctions between them.
DOS has a hierarchial file system, and this has the following implications:
• The root (highest) directory contains subdirectories which themselves can
contain subdirectories, and so on. Thus, the hierarchial system looks like
the root system of a tree. An initial backslash in a path always denotes
the root directory. Subdirectories in a path have names other than \.
• The current directory is the directory DOS uses when you run a command
and do not specify a directory. Each drive in your system has a current
directory. Any directory in the file system on a disk can be the current
directory for that disk.
• A parent directory is any directory that contains subdirectories. Consider
the following example:
-> LANGS

BASIC LISP

In the example, LANGS is the parent of BASIC and LISP. (The root
directory is the parent of all directories in a file system.)
• A subdirectory is a directory that appears under a directory In the
example for the above item, BASIC and LISP are subdirectories under
LANGS.

Using Reference Information 1-7

Files
Files contain alphanumeric and special characters, or they contain images of
bits, bytes, and code. You can have several types of files: text, program, object,
graphics, and so on. Files have names andean have an extension. For example,
in:

my_junk.lxt my_junk is the file name and lxtis the extension.

Periods separate file names from extensions. A file name can have one to eight
characters. An extension can have one to three characters. A name can have any
combination of upper- and lower-case letters because DOS changes lower-case to
upper-case.
Reserved Characters. Besides not using \, ", <, and > for obvious reasons,
the table shows the characters you cannot use in a file name or extension.

/ + *
space

You can use a hyphen and underscore in file names, and except in cases where
DOS or a command requires an extension, having an extension is optional (for
example, my-junk. txt or my_junk).
Reserved FUe Names and Extensions. Besides not using certain characters,
you cannot use certain reserved file names and extensions.

1-8 Using Reference Information

The reserved file names set aside by DOS include:

AUX CLOCK$ COMl COM2 COMB COM4

CON LPTl LPT2 LPT8 NUL PRN

Reserved extensions include:

BAK Appended by BACKUP commands to the backup files.

BAT Given to DOS batch files (executable scripts).
CHK Appended to files recovered by CHKDSK commands.
COM Given to executable program files.
EXE Given to executable program files.
MAP A default extension for the list files created by MS-LINK.
MSG Application developed by HP have this extension.
OVL DOS uses the extension for overlay files.

REC DOS uses the extension for files recovered by RECOVER

commands.
SYS Given to files that are device drivers (programs that enable
a system to communicate with a device).
$$$ Used by DOS to designate temporary files.

Some commonly accepted extensions include:

BAS Given to programs dcveloI)('d in the BASIC language.

BIN Given to binary files.

DOC Given to text files that are documents.

TXT Given to files containing text.

USing Reference Information 1-9

Wildcard Characters. In a file name or extension, DOS interprets * and ? as
"wildcard" characters (that is, DOS substitutes characters for them).

* means substitute an entire file name or extension.

? means substitute a single character in a file name or
extension at the relative location of the question mark.
You can have a question mark for each relative character
to be substituted (for example, ??1. wk? specifies files
whose name has two characters and one (1) and whose
extension has wk and any character.

The following examples illustrate the process:

** Specifies all file names and all extensions.

*.DOC Specifies all file names having the DOC extension.
Chapter? Specifies all file names having Chapter and one
additional character such as 1, 2, ... ,9 or A, B, ... ,Z.
RPT*. ?? Specifies all files having RPT and any additional
characters, and also having a two-character extension.
???file *. TXT Specifies files having any 3 initial characters, file,
any additional characters, and also having the TXT
extension.

By using wildcards, you can specify files very efficiently, but using them with
commands such as ERASE, RESTORE, and BACKUP can produce disastrous
or surprising results. A good procedure is to test a comprehensive wildcard
specification with DIR to see what gets listed. Then, use the sanle specification
with a command such as ERASE.

1-10 Using Reference Information

Parameters and Options (Switches)
Many DOS commands use or accept parameters and options that alter or specify
how the commands work.
Parameters. Parameters such as device or codepage in a command imply that
you can provide a value for a device or code page that determines how a command
works. For example, substituting PRN for device would tell a command to use
the parallel printer while substituting COM2 would tell a command to use the
device hooked to the second serial port.
Parameters can be required or optional. The syntax encloses optional parameters
in brackets. For example,
[junk stuff pieces]
means that junk, stuff, and pieces are all optional parameters. The manual avoids
using:
[junk] [stuff] [pieces]
because the syntax for some commands can become too cluttered to read.
Options (Switches). Besides parameters, some commands have options (also
called switches) that alter the way a command works. Some switches stand alone
and others have parameters. Switches always begin with a slash, and you either
use them or do not use them (that is, they toggle an action). For example:
/X The backslash with a letter naInes a stand-alone switch that toggles
an action a command can take. For example, such a switch might
cause a command that normally ignores read-only files to include
read-only files.
/X:junk This switch has a parameter. Consequently, deciding to use the
switch will toggle an action, and substituting a value for the
parameter will determine how the action works.
The syntax encloses options in brackets to imply that you can decide whether to
use them, but the syntax does not enclose each switch separately.
Besides reading the syntax, the "Tips and Hints" section always discusses
parameters and options, and explains how they work.

USing Reference Information 1-11

Using the Parts in a Command
Earlier sections discusses the parts of a command: the command name, drives
and disks, devices, paths, directories, files, reserved names, extensions, wildcards,
and parameters/options.
In particular, the parts of a command can include a drive, path, filename, and
extension. Together, a drive, path, filename, and extension can be viewed as a file
specification, or filespec. To help you read the syntax, this nlanual uses filespec
to imply that you may need to specify a:
1. drive such as C:;
2. path such as \pro]\new\;
3. filename such as reporL 1; or
4. extension such as .doc.
When at least one of these items is required, you see filespec. When any or all of
the items are optional, you see [filespec J.
In most cases, DOS commands that use file specifications require specifying the
filename, and when you do not specify a drive or path, the conunand uses the
current drive and path. Extensions are usually optional, but they can be helpful
for specifying the files a command acts upon. The "Tips and Hints" section
always provides additional information about specifying files, and in particular,
the section points out exceptions in how a command works.

1-12 Using Reference Information

To get a first look at the parts, here is the syntax for a variation of the MODE
command that shows the idea while having some distinctions:

MODE device CODEPAGE [/ STATUS}

Study the syntax and note the following items:

MODE The command name. Type this literally.
device A required parameter (no brackets). Substitute a value such
as CON.
CODEPAGE A required parameter, but you do not substitute a parame-
ter. CODEPAGE alters the function of MODE (the MODE
comnland has 8 derivatives, and you determine the deriva-
tive with parameters such as CODEPAGE or CODEPAGE
REFRESH). Another distinction is that you can just type
CP for CODEPAGE. This illustrates a principle: For some
DOS commands, you should study the syntax, examples,
and tips/hints to get a complete picture of how the com-
mand works.
[/STATUSj A switch that causes the command to display its status. The
exception here is that the name of the switch is STATUS.
In most cases, a single letter names a switch.
No filespec This command does not have a file specification. Many other
commands do have one or more file specifications.
As you can see, the syntax shows the structure of a command and the parts in
it; but it does not show you what to type. You can deduce what to type by also
studying the examples and tips/hints.

USing Reference Information 1-13

Using Symbols in Commands
The syntax of DOS commands can use the following symbols:
CAPS Items in capital letters must be typed exactly as shown. The
command is always in capital letters. Other entities appear in capital
letters when necessary.
Italics Items such as filespec, codepage, IV appear in italics to imply that yo~
specify file(s), substitute values for parameters, and make decisions
about using switches. For example, to enter a filespec, you might
actually type c: \reports\old\may. txt
[items] Brackets enclose similar items where you can optionally use the en-
closed items according to the requirements for running the command.
The following example is for a command having three switches:

[/ V Ie I P]
I and \ A slash (I) precedes options called switches (for example, IN:xx). A
backslash (\) has two meanings. It separates directories in a path; and
designates the root directory when it is the first entry in a path (for
example, \docs\memos\cleanup.txt has a file named cleanup. txt
in a directory named memos in a directory named docs in the root
directory) .
A vertical bar separates two items when you can use one of the items,
but not both.
An ellipsis implies that you can have more than one entry of the
preceding type (for example, filespecl filespec2 . .. means you might
actually enter rpt 1. txt rpt2. txt rpt3. txt).
Use punctuation such as colons, COlllmas, and equal signs exactly as they appear
in the syntax.

1-14 Using Reference Information

Using Internal and External Commands
DOS has internal and external commands.
Internal commands are loaded into memory when you start up DOS. Therefore,
you never need to precede an internal command with a drive and path that tells
DOS where to find the command.
External commands are not loaded into merIlory until you execute them. With
few exceptions, the memory used by an external command is released when the
command terminates. Because you can execute an external command from any
location in the directory structure while the external DOS commands are typically
stored in a certain directory, you may need to precede the command with a drive
and/or path that shows DOS where to find the command.
Most reference manuals precede external cOInmands with [d:path] to imply that
you can optionally provide a drive and/or path to the command. This manual
does not do this because we wanted to keep the syntax clean and easy to read.
You will, however, need to account for the location of external commands in your
directory structure, and you have two ways to do this:
1. l'vlost people put external DOS commands in the root directory on drive
C. (Some applications expect DOS external commands to be in the root
directory on drive C when you have a hard disk.) If you do this~ and you
work in subdirectories or on a disk in drive A, you need to specify c:1
ahead on an external command.
2. An alternative is to have a PATH command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file
that runs when you start up DOS. (An AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains
commands and programs that run when you start DOS or an application
for the purpose of setting up DOS or the application.) By using PATH,
you can tell DOS where to look for commands and programs. If you
account for how you use your system, you never need to precede an
external command with a drive or path.

Using Reference Information 1-15

Running External Commands With
A Flexible Disk Drive and A Hard Disk Drive
People typically copy the files on the DOS systenl disk from drive A to the root
directory on drive C during installation and then start up DOS from drive C.
Then, depending on their system, people use drive A or drive B for data disks,
applications, library disks, and so on (some system do not have drive B). In most
cases, the root directory on drive C contains the DOS commands.
During a working session, if you move to a subdirectory on drive C or move to
drive A, and execute an external command, you need to specify c:\ ahead of the
command to tell DOS the location of the command. For example,
1. If you are in c:\ utils\ tools; and
2. You want to format a flexible disk in drive A; and
3. The root directory on drive C has the DOS commands; then
4. You would need to type:
c:\format a:

to help DOS find the FORMAT command.

You can avoid needing to do this by including an appropriate PATH comnland in
the AUTOEXEC.BAT file for DOS. But whatever you do, the point is this: when
DOS cannot find an external. command, nothing serious happens. You merely
get the following error message:
Bad command or filename

Press any key to continue

On getting this message, you need to retype the command, preceding the
command with a drive and path to the command's location in the file systeln.

1-16 Using Reference Information

Running a DOS Command
This section shows how to use some entities and symbols to execute a DOS
command. For convenience, the illustration uses a hypothetical ·command named
DIG which has equally hypothetical entities.
C>A: \DIG DEEP C: \KIDS\NEED\MONEY. NOW / A=250 I Return I
The following items discuss the entities:
The DOS prompt. You do not type this. It appears on the
display to indicate that DOS is waiting~ ready for you to type
a command.
A:\ Assuming DIG is an external command, you often need to
type a drive and path that shows DOS where to look for a
comrnand. When and how you do this depends on how you
set up your system and your location in the system when you
execute an external command. In this case, you tell DOS to
look for DIG in the root directory on drive A.
DIG The name of the command. You never need a preceding drive
or path for internal commands. You may need a preceding
drive and/or path for external commands.
DEEP A parameter that shapes how DIG works. The type,
location, and nature of parameters to a command vary among
commands. Some commands have no parameters. Others
may have several.

Using Reference Information 1-017

C:\KIDS\NEED The drive and path names that show DOS where to find a file.
Some commands read, write, or load a file; and when they do,
you often need to specify a drive and path.
MONEY.NOW The name of a file, with its extension, that will be used in
sorne way by the command.
/A=250 A special option called a switch that turns the feature
determined by / A on or off. A slash always precedes a switch,
which usually appears at the end of a command line.
I Return 1 You always terminate a DOS command by typing the Return
key, which is the same as the Enter key. Later, in the reference
material, we do not show I Return I, but you always type it after
you type a command.
Except for typing the command and I Return I, and perhaps typing a drive and path
for an external command, all other entities in a command line can be required
or optional, depending on the command and how you want the command to
work. When using a command, think about what you want to do, study what
the command does, and use the entities that make the command work according
to your needs.

1-18 Using Reference Information

 2
MS-DOS Commands
This chapter contains reference material for DOS 3.3 commands. Chapter 3
describes commands for processing batch files. The alphabetized commands in
this chapter provide the information shown in the table. (To recover from errors,
note the displayed error message, move to A ppendix A, and apply the information
provided in a box under the message.)

Information Provided for DOS Commands

Type of Information Description

Heading The full name of the command and any short versions.
Version and Source Lists versions of DOS having a command (for example, Version
2 to present means the command began with version 2 of DOS
and appears in subsequent versions. The Source indicates
whether a command is Internal or External.
Purpose States what the command does (implies how to use it).
Syntax Shows the command name and any options, specifications,
switches, or parameters. The syntax does not indicate a drive
and path for external commands, assuming instead that you
provide a drive and path or use PATH according to your
system. Brackets enclose optional items, and a "Tips and
Hints" section explains them.
Examples Provides examples with descriptions.
Tips and Hints Provides information about limitations, requirements,
relationships, dependencies, and so on. You also get
information about how and when to use the command.

MS-DOS Commands 2-1

APPEND
External, Version 3.3
Sets a search path (or paths) to one or more directories for data files. It also
displays and deletes existing search paths. The command has several purposes,
depending on how you use the syntax. (See "Examples".)

Syntax
APPEND [dl:pathl;d2:path2; ... ] [IX IE]
I L Places search paths in environment
L Redirects programs using DOS func-
tions

More drives and paths allowed

' - - - - - - - - - Drives and paths where DOS searches for
nonprog/nonbatch files

Examples

Command Result / Action

append c : \ tools; c : \util Makes DOS look for nonprogram and nonbatch
files in \ tools and \ util on drive C.
append; Cancels existing APPEND search paths.
append Shows the current search path set by APPEND.
append Ix Ie The IX makes DOS intercept SEARCH FIRST,
FIND FIRST, and EXEC function calls from
DOS. With IE, DOS places the paths given to
APPEND in the environment. Do not specify a
path with these switches ..

2-2 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• APPEND loads from a disk the first time you use it. Thereafter, it is a
memory-resident command until you restart DOS.
• You can use IX and IE only when you first execute APPEND. You must
not specify any path names with these switches.
• Not entering drive names uses the current drive.
• When you do specify paths:
o Semicolons must separate the paths.
o A search for data files occurs in the order of paths specified by
APPEND, until the list of directory paths is exhausted.
• The specified paths cannot exceed 127 characters. DOS skips invalid
paths.
• The IX switch enables executable files that use EXEC, SEARCH FIRST,
and FIND FIRST functions to access search paths. The executables
include DOS commands such as COMP, DIR, and TREE. If you don't
specify the switch, only the executable files that use OPEN FILE,
HANDLE OPEN, and GET FILE SIZE can access the APPEND search
paths.
• APPEND; cancels existing search paths.
• When using IE, DOS establishes an environment variable named AP-
PEND. The variable holds the paths set by an APPEND conlmand.
• A file found by APPEND can be read safely by the program, but changes
in the file are saved in a copy placed in the current directory, leaving the
original file intact.
• To use APPEND and ASSIGN, you must execute APPEND before using
ASSIGN.
• Do not use APPEND IX with RESTORE or BACKUP.

MS-DOS Commands 2-3

ASSIGN
External, Version 2 to present
Reassigns all disk read and write requests from one drive to another drive.

Syntax
ASSIGN [dl=d2 ... ]

II L Means you can have more than one assignment

Drive you want DOS to use instead of the usual drive
Drive that programs and DOS use when not assigned

Examples

Command Result/ Action

assign b=c a=c Assigns drives Band A to drive C.
assign Cancels assignments.

2-4 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You seldom need to use ASSIGN on a system having recent software and
a hard disk drive. You typically use the command with software that
recognizes only drives A and B.
• Do not assign a drive to a drive that is not on your system.
• You can assign a drive to another drive, but you cannot assign a drive to
itself.
• Do not assign a real drive to a nonexistent drive.
• One command can have multiple assignments, separated by a space. For
example:
c:\util\assign a=c b=c d=c

where, in this case, DOS looks for ASSIGN in c:\ util and assigns drives
A, B, and D to drive C.
• Copy protection schemes used by some programs ignore ASSIGN.
• For a command such as ASSIGN A=F, which uses F or a "greater" letter,
you must have previously set up an appropriate LASTD RIVE command
in CONFIG.SYS.
• You can use a space between the drive letters, the = is optional.
• DISKCOPY and DISKCOMP ignore drive reassignments.
• FORMAT fails when you attempt to format an assi'gned drive.
• Cancel assignments before you use BACKUP, JOIN, LABEL, PRINT,
RESTORE, or SUBST.

MS-DOS Commands 2-5

ATTRIB
External, Version 3 to present
Displays, sets, or clears the read-only and archive status for a file (or files).

Syntax
ATTRIB [±R] [±A] filespec [IS]

I I LExtends effects to subdirectories

Drive, path, and file having affected attribute
Sets( +) or clears( -) archive status
' - - - - - - - - Sets( +) or clears (-) read-only status

Examples

Command Result / Action

attrib +r a: \data. * /s Sets read-only status for files in the root directory
on drive A named data with any extension. In
addition, the command applies the status to all
subsequent subdirectories (version 3.3 only).
attrib -r -a a: \*. * Clears the read-only and archive status of all files
in the root directory on drive A.
attrib +r -a c: \rpt? txt Sets read-only status and clears archive status
of files in c:\ whose names have rpt and one
additional character plus the txt extension (for
example, rptl.txt, rpta.txt, and so on).
attrib report Displays the attributes of the file named report.

2-6 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• ATTRIB works best when you use supplemental files such as library files.
Just make the files read-only, and you will not need to worry about writing
over them.
• You cannot modify or delete a read-only file, but you can rename such a
file. The latter practice is not recommended because you might confuse
programs that use the file.
• Not specifying a drive or path uses files in the current drive and path.
• Not specifying filespec causes an error.
• You can use both options in a command, mixing the signs as needed (for
example, +R -A). But do not set an option to on and off (for example
+R -R).
• Copying read-only files does not pass on the read-only attribute to the
new file.
• The archive attribute affects BACKUP and XCOPY when you use then
with 1M. A file is copied when the archive attribute is set and is not
copied when the attribute is not set.

MS-DOS Commands 2-7

BACKUP
External, Version 2 to present
Backs up at least one file from a disk onto another disk. (Note: Using this
command appropriately is important. Read all the information before doing a
backup.)

Syntax

.----------- File{s) to be backed up

, . - - - - - - - Drive to receive back up files

~
Backs up subdirectories
I Backs up files modified since last backup
I I Appends new backup files to disk
BACKUP filespec d2: [IS 1M I A ID:date IT:time IF IL:filespec]

Backs up files created on or after date I I

Backs up files created at or after time ~
Formats destination disk ---------1
Creates log file - - - - - - - -.....

2-8 MS-DOS Commands

Examples

Command Result / Action

backup c: \* . * a: Both commands back up all files in the root
backup c: \ a: directory on drive C onto the disk(s) in drive A.
If necessary, BACKUP prompts you to insert
the next disk into drive A. You must keep track
of the order of the disks.
backup c: \rpts\*. doc a: /s Backs up all files and directories in
c:\ rpts having any file name and the doc
extension. The command places the files and
subdirectories on the disk(s) in drive A.

Switches in the Syntax

/S Backs up all subdirectories beginning at the current or specified

source directory.
/M Backs up all files modified since the last backup. The switch also
backs up files that have been created since the last backup.
/A Adds the specified source files to previously backed-up files. Without
the switch, DOS deletes the files already on the backup disk (that is,
it deletes all files on a flexible disk or in /BACKUP on a hard disk).
To use this switch with flexible disks, the initial disk must contain the
special files created by BACKUP during the previous backup. The
files are called CONTROL.xxx and BACKUP.xxx where xxx is the
number of the disk. Saying this another way, the first disk for the
current backup should be the last disk from previous backup.
The switches continue on the next page.

MS-DOS Commands 2-9

ID:date Backs up files created on or after date. The format of date varies,
depending on the continent. Also, the delimiter can vary (for example
a slash).
mm-dd-yy North America
dd-mm-yy Europe
yy-mm-dd East Asia
mm The month (1 through 12)
dd The day (1 through 31)
yy The year (00 through 99)
IT:time Backs up files changed or created at or after time (for example
2:30:45) on the date given by ID:date. Some countries use a period
as a separator instead of a colon. Do not use this switch without
using the switch for date.
hh The hour (0 through 23)
mm The minutes (0 through 59)
ss The seconds (0 through 59)
IF Formats the destination disk before backing up files on it when the
disk is unformatted (version 3.3 only). Including this switch lets you
use unformatted disks for the backup. (The formatting slows down
the back-up process.)
The switches continue on the next page

2-10 MS-DOS Commands

IL:filespec Creates a log file according to these rules:
• Not giving a drive uses the source drive. You
cannot use the destination drive.
• Not giving a path uses the current directory.
• When giving a logfile name, use a colon between
L and any additional specification. Do not use
spaces.
• When not giving a logfile name, do not include a
colon. BACKUP will create BACKUP.LOG.
• If a logfile exists, BACKUP adds to it. If one does
not exist, BACKUP creates a new file.
• If you use the switch and do not specify anything,
BACKUP aborts.

Tips and Hints

• You must specify a source and destination drive. Neither drive can be
used in ASSIGN, JOIN, or SUBST commands. Not specifying a drive
causes an error. For the destination, you specify only the disk drive (for
example, A:).
• Besides the drive:
D You can specify a path and/or file(s) for the source.
D Not specifying a path backs up files in the current directory.
D Not specifying a file or files backs up all files in a directory.
D You can use wildcard characters (* and ?).
• You can use the IF switch to format the disks during the backup.
• You can get several messages concerning a full disk. A hard disk must
have enough room to hold all of the backed up files. If you don't have
enough room, you will need to delete files or otherwise provide for more
storage space, and try again.
• When you back up onto flexible disks, DOS asks you to insert a new disk
after the current disk fills up. Insert an appropriate disk (not one having

MS-DOS Commands 2-11

 valuable data) and be sure to record the order of the disks. To restore a
backup later, you must insert the disks in order .
• You can retrieve a backup only with RESTORE. Otherwise, you cannot
use the backup files .
• BACKUP follows the convention provided by VERIFY. If VERIFY is
ON, DOS ensures correct storage of the files. IF VERIFY is OFF, DOS
does not ensure correct storage.

2-12 MS-OOS Commands

This page has no reference material.

MS-DOS Commands 2-13

BREAK
Internal, Version 2 to present
Determines when DOS looks for a I CTRL HBreak I or I CTRL ~@] to stop a program.

Syntax
BREAK [ON I OFF]
L Turns BREAK on or off

Examples

Command Result/ Action

break on Turns BREAK on so DOS will look for
I CTRL HBreak I.
break Displays the current status of BREAK.

2-14 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• BREAK is either on or off.

• When BREAK is on, DOS looks for I GTRL HBreak I when performing any
DOS operation. When BREAK is off, DOS looks for I GTRL HBreak I only
when performing an operation with the:
o Terminal or keyboard.
o Printer.
o RS-232 adapters (asynchronous adapters).
• DOS displays no messages when BREAK is on.
• DOS works about 2% slower when BREAK is on. The command has little
effect on disk performance.
• A BREAK command has the same effect as having an equivalent BREAK
directive in CONFIG.SYS.
• You seldorn need to have BREAK on unless you run long programs that
have little interaction with the monitor, keyboard, and printer. Some
progranls bypass DOS for character and disk operations. When these
programs are running, I CTRL HBreak lor I GTRL H]] may not interrupt them
even though a BREAK ON command is in effect.

MS-DOS Commands 2-15

CHCP
Internal, Version 3.3
Changes the code page (font) used by DOS for as many devices as possible.

Syntax
CHep [codepage]

L A 3-digit code page number

Examples

Command Result / Action

chcp 431 Changes the code page to the font for the United
States.
chcp Displays the current code page. For example:
Active code page: 850

2-16 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Valid values for codepage include:

United States 437
Multilingual 850
Canadian 863
Denmark/Norway 865
• After successfully selecting a code page, the new code page remains active
until you change it or restart DOS. If you have directives in CONFIG.SYS
for devices that use code pages (for example, DEVICE=PRINTER.SYS
), CHCP loads the code pages for the devices.
• CHCP sets all possible devices to use a font. The MODE CODEPAGE
SELECT command is similar, but changes only one device per command.
• If you don't specify the location of COUNTRY.SYS when you execute
NLSFUNC, COUNTRY.SYS must be in the root directory of the current
disk.

MS-DOS Commands 2-17

CHOIR or CD
Internal, Version 2 to present
Changes the current directory to a specified directory, or shows the path of the
current directory.

Syntax

Changing the Directory

CHDIR [d:][path]
I The drive and path specifying the new directory

Showing the Current Directory

CHDIR [d:]
11..--__ The drive having the directory you want to show

Examples
For the examples, assume the following directory structure on drive C:
(The root directory) \

UTIL PROGS LTRS

I I
TOOLS
BASIC C

UTILS TOOLS

2-18 MS-DOS Commands

 Command Result / Action
chdir c: \util \tools Changes the directory to TOOLS under UTIL
under the root directory on drive C, using an
absolute path.
cd c: Displays the current directory on drive C (for
example,
C:\PROGS
where PROGS is the current directory).
cd basic Changes the directory to BASIC, which must
be under the current directory (PROGS) on the
current drive (C:), using a relative path.
chdir .. \ltrs Moves to the next higher directory on the current
drive, and changes the directory to LTRS.

Tips and Hints

• Absolute paths start with a backslash. You can then specify subdirectories
in the path as desired (for example, \RPTS\ OLD\JUNE proceeds
absolutely to JUNE).
• Relative paths do not start with a backslash. They assume the current
directory and move down to a subdirectory. For example, if you are in
PROGS, then C\ UTILS is a relative path to UTILS.
• By using .. \ or .. \ .. \ (and so on), you can move up one, two, or more levels
in a relative sense and then specify a directory (for example, .. \ .. \docs).
• A specified path can have up to 63 characters.
• Using an invalid path displays an error message.

MS-DOS Commands 2-19

CHKDSK
External, Version 1 to present
Checks the directories and file allocation table (FAT) of a disk. Reports disk and
memory status. Can repair errors in the directories and FAT.

Syntax
CHKDSK [filespec] [IF IV]
I ~ IF makes repairs; IV displays messages
L . . .- - - - - Drive, path, and file name for files being checked

Examples

Command Result/ Action

chkdsk c : \ * . * IF IV Checks all directories and files in the root
directory on drive C. The IF (for fix) asks
CHKDSK to make possible repairs. The IV (for
verbose) asks CHKDSK to display messages and
show progress during the process.
chkdsk a: Checks all directories and files on the disk in drive
A. The command does not fix anything and does
not show messages.
c : \ chkdsk c: IV >prn Checks directories and files on drive C with the
verbose mode and redirects messages to the
printer.

Tips and Hints

• Not specifying a drive or path uses the current drive and directory.
• If you have a one-drive system and want to check a disk, insert a system
disk in drive A and execute:
chkdsk b:

2-20 MS-DOS Commands

 By specifying drive B, you are asked to insert the desired disk.
• If you include a file specification, CHKDSK checks the file for continuity.
• You must use compatible versions of DOS and CHKDSK because the
command has been changed across versions.
• CHKDSK will not work on disks affected by an ASSIGN, JOIN, or
SUBST.
• When you run CHKDSK with IF and the command finds a problem,
the command displays a message and asks you about repairing it. The
messages can be unclear, and in some cases, you need expert knowledge
of DOS to decide what to do.

MS-DOS Commands 2-21

CLS
Internal, Version 2 to present
Clears the current display, leaving the cursor at home (the upper-left corner).

Syntax
CLS

Examples
You do not need any. Just execute CLS.

2-22 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• If you set the foreground and background colors with ANSI control codes,
the color settings remain in effect.
• If you did not set the foreground and background colors, the display shows
light characters on a dark background.
• CLS has no effect on DOS; it affects only the display.

MS-DOS Commands 2-23

COMMAND
External, Version 2 to present
Runs a second copy of COMMAND.COM, which is the command processor.

Syntax
COMMAND [d:][path] [IE:size IP Ie string]

L Passes a list to new copy of COM-

MAND.COM
Keeps the code in memory until
you restart DOS
1....-_ _ _ _ _ _ Sets the size in bytes of the envi-
ronment (160 to 32768)
' - - - - - - - - - - - - Drive/path to COMMAND.COM
for reloading transient part.

Examples

Command Result / Action

command Ie batch-x Establishes a new command processor
(COMMAND.COM) that contains the commands
contained in batch-x.

2-24 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Provide the drive and path when COMMAND. COM is not in the root
directory of the startup disk.
• The string used with the Ie option is interpreted by the copy of the new
CO MMAND. CO M as though you typed string at the system level. If you
use IC, it must be the last option. Do not use the Ie and IP options in
the saIne command.
• COMMAND. CO M is the only processor that can be loaded into memory.
This has several implications:
D Executing COMMAND with no parameters loads a new copy of
the command processor, but the environment remains as it was.
D You can use COMMAND IC batch_name to pass control between
batch files that make DOS behave according to the contents of the
files. When a batch file finishes, COMMAND exits and returns
control to the first batch file.
D You can use COMMAND with Ie and a DOS command such as
CHKDSK.
• If you execute COMMAND with IP, you can use EXIT to get back to
the previous processor level.
• Running programs from a secondary command processor is called running
programs from a shell. Menus for applications are often run from DOS
shells.
• In using IE:size, the size can range from 160 to 32768 in multiples of 16
bytes. Changing the environment of a secondary processor has no effect
on the environment of the primary processor.

MS-DOS Commands 2-25

COMP
External, Version 1 to present
Compares the contents of two files and reports differences.

Syntax
COMP [jilespecl] [jilespec2]
I LThe drive, path, and files on the 2nd disk
'-.- - - - - - T h e drive, path, and files on the 1st disk

Examples

Command Result/ Action

comp c: \*. * a: \*. * Compares all files in the root directory on drive C
with all files in the root directory on drive A. (For
context, suppose you copied all files in the root
directory on A to the root directory on C and you
want to compare them.)
comp *.txt *.doc Using files from the current directory and drive,
the command compares files having the txt
extension with files having the doc extension.
comp Without parameters, the command prompts you
to specify the parameters. Trying the command
this way provides a good training session.

Tips and Hints

• Not specifying anything makes COMP prompt you for information about
the primary and secondary files.
• Not specifying drives and paths uses the current drives and paths.
• Not specifying a file name for the primary file uses all the files in the
specified or current primary directory. In the secondary directory, the

2-26 MS-DOS Commands

 command compares only the files matching the files from the primary
directory.
• COMP compares normal disk files, it does not examine hidden or system
files.
• COMP does not compare files having matching names but different
lengths. You get a message saying this.
• COMP ends comparing and aborts on finding 10 pairs of files that do not
match.
• The drive, path, or file specifications can be the same for the primary and
secondary file sets. You can use wildcard characters in the file names.

MS-DOS Commands 2-27

COpy
Internal, Version 1 to present
Copies one or more files from one disk or directory to another. COpy can also
copy a file in a directory to the same directory provided the copy has a different
name. Finally, COpy can combine two or more files into one file.

Syntax

Making Copies of Files

,---_ _ _ _ _ _ _ Source file( s) are ASCII (text)

, - - - - - - - - - - Source file( s) are binary (programs)

~
Source file(s) to be copied
Destination file( s) are ASCII (text)
.1 I Destination filets) are binary (programs)
COpy [IAlB] filespecl [IAlB] filespec2 [IAIBIV]

Destination filets) to be created J II

Add end of file marker to new copies
Don't add end of file marker
Verify that copy has been recorded

2-28 MS-DOS Commands

Joining Several Files to Make One Copy

, . . - - - - - - - - - First source file to be joined

r Next source file to be joined
COpy [IAlB] Jilespecl [IAlB] [+ jilespec2 [/AlB] ... J jilespecS [IAIBIV}

Additional files can be joined - , I .

Destination file to be created -----.J

See the "Tips and Hints" section to see how the drives, paths, filenames, and
switches work. Except for specifying files, you have many options for executing
a COpy command.

Examples

Command Result / Action

copy a:\*.* c:\app\*.* Copies all files from the root directory on drive A
to the app directory in the root directory on drive
C. (In g'eneral, you use this example to copy files
from an application on a flexible disk in drive A
into a directory of your choice under the root
directory on your hard disk.)
copy junk1 + junk2 my-junk In the current directory and drive, the command
joins junkl and junk2 into a file named my-junk.
copy fa c:\*.doc b: fa Treats all files having the doc extension in the root
directory on drive C as ASCII files (the first / A) .
Copies the files to the root directory on drive B,
giving the files an end-of-file marker (the second
/A). The typical EOF is Control-Z.

MS-DOS Commands 2-29

Tips and Hints

• Specify the options (switches) affecting the source ahead of the source
specification. For example, IB c:\ bin\ *. * makes the source consist of all
files in the bin directory in the root directory on drive C.
IA Treat the source files as ASCII (text) files. A command copies
information up to but not including the EOF. (Without a
specification, COpy assumes the source files are ASCII files.)
IB Treat the source files as program (binary) files; which will copy
the EOFs and treat them as normal characters.
• Specify the options (switches) for the destination files after the source
specification. For example, A:\RPT? TXT I A makes a copy in the root
directory on drive A of all files having RPT and one character plus the
TXT extension. You need the I A after the destination files to add an
end-of-file marker to the copies when you use I A with the source files.
D I A means add an end-of-file marker to the copied files.
D IB means do not add an end-of-file marker to copied binary files.
D IV means verify that a copy has been recorded.

• The position of the I A and IB options determines their meaning. An

option affects the file immediately preceding the option and all subsequent
files until another, similar option is encountered. When using an option
before a file specification, the option stays in effect until contradicted by
another I A or IB option.
• When copying files having a source and destination specification:
D Enter the source and then the destination specifications.
D Unless specified, COpy uses the current drive and path.
D Not specifying the destination name uses the source name.
D You can substitute a device name such as PRN for the source or
destination name.
D When copying between disk drives, COPY assumes binary files as
if you used lB.
D When copying to or from a non-disk device, COPY assumes ASCII
files as if you used I A.
D Using I A or IB overrides the above two items.

2-30 MS-DOS Commands

• When copying files having only a source specification:
D The source specification must have one or both of:
1. a file name
2. a drive or path name (or both). If you give both, at least
one must differ from the current directory and drive.
D The source cannot be a device name.
D The destination is the current directory and drive.
D COpy assumes binary files are being copied as if you used lB .
• When joining (concatenating) files:
D The destination file is the last file in the list unless a + precedes
it.
o Not giving a destination file uses the first file name in the source.
D You must give a valid source file name; and all succeeding files
must be preceded by a +.
D You can have only one destination file specification. Not using
wildcards in it creates one destination file. Using wildcards in it
creates more than one destination file.
D Not specifying a destination file uses the name of the first source
file as follows:
• The files being joined are appended to the first source file .
• If you use wildcards, the destination file name has the
name of the first source file.

MS-DOS Commands 2-31

CTTY
Internal, Version 2 to present
Changes the standard input and output device to an auxiliary console, or changes
the input and output device back from an auxiliary console to the keyboard and
video display.

Syntax
CTTY device

L Name of the new input/output device (e.g. COM1, CON:)

Examples

Command Result / Action

CTTY COM1 Makes the device attached to COM! the new
console. The device must be a terminal or
teleprinter. After executing the command, DOS
gets normal input from COM! and sends anything
meant for the video display to COMl.
ctty con: Makes the keyboard and video display the console.
The colon after a device name is optional. (In
effect, the command cancels the above example.)

2-32 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You must specify a character device that can receive input from and send
output to your computer system. You cannot use CTTY with a printer,
for example, because it only accepts output. If you accomplished this,
the system would wait forever for you to type commands on the printer's
nonexistent keyboard. You would need to restart DOS.
• Some programs do not use DOS for standard input and output routines.
Such programs bypass DOS and communicate with the hardware directly,
or they use ROM BIOS I/O routines. CTTY has no effect on these
programs.
• The command was added to DOS so people could use a terminal or
teleprinter for input and output instead of the normal keyboard and video
display.

MS-DOS Commands 2-33

DATE
Internal, Version 1 to present
Displays the system date, or lets you change the date.

Syntax
DATE [date_ string]

I A string for the date (e.g. 3-25-88)

Examples

Command Result/ Action

date 12-9-88 Sets the date to December 9 1988 in North
America.
date 6-10-89 Sets the date to 6 October 1989 in Europe.
date 88-3-9 Sets the date to 1988 March 9 in East Asia.

2-34 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The format of the date varies among continents:

mm-dd-yy North America
dd-mm-yy Europe
yy-mm-dd East Asia
The ranges for the month, day, and year are:
mm 1-12
dd 1-31
yy 80-99
Instead of yy, you can use yyyy where the range is 1980 to 2099.
• After starting DOS, you may see DATE and TIME prompts. Responding
to the prompts lets you set the system date and time, or you can type
I Return I to not set them.
• If you don't set the date, DOS might display and use an incorrect date.
• If the boot disk has an AUTOEXEC.BAT file, DOS does not display the
prompts. You can include DATE and TIME commands in the batch file
to set the system clock when you start DOS.
• Some computers have battery operated clocks. After setting the date and
time when you install the system, you should not need to set them again
unless the battery fails.
• The system time built into many PCs is a software clock. If you leave the
system on all the time, the date is usually correct, but the time might not
be correct.
• DOS uses the date and time when manipulating files and when you
perform backups.
• Besides using a hyphen as a delimiter, you can use a period or slash (for
example, 10-20-88, 10.20.88, or 10/20/88). The displayed date varies
according to the country code set in CONFIG.SYS.

MS-DOS Commands 2-35

DEL
Internal, Version 1 to present
Deletes files from a disk.

Syntax
DEL filespec
I The file(s) to be deleted

Examples

Command Result / Action

del a:*. * Erases all files in the current directory on the disk
in drive A.
del c: \tools\ ?ag. * Erases all files having one initial character and ag
with any extension from the directory named tools
in the root directory on drive C (for example,
tag. txt, sag.doc, gag.exe).
del junk. txt Erases junk. txt from the current directory and
drive.

Tips and Hints

• When you specify *. *, DOS provides the following prompt:

Are you sure (YIN)?

Be sure you know what such a specification will delete. The * wildcard
can produce devastating results. Use DIR to check the files affected by a
specification before using it with DEL .
• Like most commands that alter files, not specifying the drive and path
uses the current drive and path. Not specifying at least one of a drive,
path, or file causes an error.

2-36 MS-DOS Commands

• You cannot delete a directory, including the current directory and
the parent directory, from a subdirectory. (Use RMDIR to remove a
directory. )
• Technically, DEL alters the entries in a directory for the removed files
and frees the space they occupied on a disk. If you decide you must get
them back, and before you use the disk for any other operation, you can
sometimes recover the files with special utility programs designed for this
purpose.
• Specifying a path without a file name is identical to specifying a path
with *. * for the file name. In the following example, DOS asks if you are
sure, and deletes all files in the root directory on drive A if you enter Y.
DEL a:\
• The DEL command is identical in function to the ERASE command.

MS-DOS Commands 2-37

DIR
Internal, Version 1 to present
Lists files and subdirectories in a directory.

Syntax
DIR [filespec] [/P /W]
I I I List file names only, 5 per line
Pause when display is filled
Drive, path, and file to the directory

Examples

Command Result / Action

dir c: \ * .* /w /p Lists all files in the root directory on drive C. The
/w gives an 80 column listing that omits the size,
date, and time related to a file. The /p pauses the
listing when the display fills up.
dir /w >prn Lists files in current directory and drive in 80
column format and redirects the list to a printer.
dir c: \proj ects\rpt? . * /p Lists files in the directory named projects in the
root directory on drive C and lists all files having:
rpt; one character after rpt (for example rptl);
and any extension. The /p pauses the listing.
dir c: \basic Lists files in basic in the root directory on drive C;
showing sizes, dates, and times. Not using DATE
and TIME to set the date and time makes the
listing inaccurate.

2-38 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The options (switches) work as follows:

IP Pauses a listing when the display fills up, waiting for you to
press a key.
IW Provides an 80 column list in which files appear in five columns
per line; the dates and times do not appear; and subdirectories
are not differentiated from files.
• DIR shows only the files in a specified or current directory. To see all files
on a disk, use CHKDSK with !V or TREE with IF.
• You can see files in only one directory at a time.
• Not specifying a path or drive uses the current path and drive.
• Not specifying a file is the same as specifying **
• DIR is affected by an ASSIGN or JOIN.
• DIR can help you prevent accidentally erasing files. You can avoid losing
them by first using DIR with the specification containing the wildcards.
When the listing shows the files you want to erase, run DEL or ERASE
with the tested specification.

MS-DOS Commands 2-39

DISKCOMP
External, Version 1 to present
Compares two flexible disks by tracks and sectors to determine if their contents
are identical. (Be aware that two flexible disks can have the same files and still
not be identical on a track/sector basis.)

Syntax
DISKCOMP [d1: d2:] [/1 /8]
I I L Compare first 8 sectors of each track
L=-- Compare first side of each disk
Second disk being compared
First disk being compared

Examples

Command Result / Action

diskcomp a: b: Compares the disk in drive A with the disk in
drive B.
diskcomp a: a: Performs a single-drive comparison on drive A,
prompting you to insert and change disks at
appropriate times. (Use this command when you
have only one drive.)
diskcomp a: b: /8 Compares eight sectors per track of the disk in
drive A with eight sectors per track of the disk in
drive B.

2-40 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The options (switches) work as follows:

/1 Compare only the first sides of two disks.
/8 Compare only 8 sectors per track, even if the first disk has 9,
15, or 18 sectors per track (DOS V2 and V3 formats).
• The main purpose for using DISKCOMP is to determine if a duplicated
disk is compatible with an original disk. Because the command checks
disks on a track/sector basis, and because DOS can copy files according
to available space, you might not get what you expect.
DUsing DISKCOMP with disks on which you previously used
COPY can suggest incompatibility when the two disks may
contain the same files. (Do not use DISKCOMP for this. Instead,
use COMP to compare disks duplicated with COPY.)
DUsing DISKCOMP to compare original and duplicate disks made
with DISKCOPY should show whether a DISKCOPY command
made an identical copy.
• Do not use DISKCOMP with disks involved in an ASSIGN, JOIN, or
SUBST; or with a virtual (RAM) disk.
• When specifying drives:
o Not specifying drives uses the current drives.
o Specifying only one valid drive causes that drive to be compared
to the current drive.
o Specifying a valid hard disk drive or an invalid flexible disk drive
causes an error.
o When comparing two disks using only one drive, DOS prompts
you to change disks.
• A duplicated disk is faulty when it was made with DISKCOPY and a
DISKCOMP shows there is a problem. Just run DISKCOPY on the
disks again. If there is still a problem, discard the duplicated disk, and
try again with a new disk.

MS-DOS Commands 2-41

DISKCOPY
External, Version 1 to present
Copies the entire contents of a flexible disk to another flexible disk on a
track/ sector basis. (The command works only with flexible disks.)

Syntax
DISKCOPY [dl: [d2:] ] [/1]
I I I Switch designates copying on one side
The drive having the disk getting the copy
The drive having the disk being copied

Examples

Command Result/ Action

diskcopy a: b: Copies everything on the disk in drive A to the
disk in drive B.

Tips and Hints

• The /1 option makes the command copy on one side of a disk.

• Both disks must be flexible disks. You cannot use DISKCOPY with hard
disks, virtual disks, or disks affected by a JOIN or SUBST command.
Specifying an invalid disk causes an error.
• DISKCOPY ignores the effects of an ASSIGN command.
• Write protect the source disk to prevent losing valuable original disks.
Using I CTRL HBreak I or opening a drive door will not always prevent
damage if you inadvertently do something wrong.

2-42 MS-DOS Commands

• When specifying drives:
o Not specifying a source drive uses the current drive.
o Specifying an invalid drive causes an error.

o Specifying only one drive makes that drive the source and
destination drives (for example, if you have only one disk drive).
o Specifying only one drive for a system having two drives causes
an invalid drive error.
o Specifying a name twice is the same as specifying one drive.

o A system having only one drive uses drive A regardless of your

specification.
o Prompts to change disks appear when you have only one drive.
• After finishing a copy, DISKCOPY prompts you about copying another
disk. Answering Y lets you make another copy of a disk. Answering N
stops the program and returns you to DOS.
• DISKCOPY automatically formats a destination disk that is not format-
ted or that has a non-DOS format, using the same format as the source
disk. The formatting does not apply when copying a double-sided disk
on a single-sided drive while using the /1 switch. It is better to format
disks before using DISKCOPY. Do not use disks reported by FORMAT
or CHKDSK as having bad sectors.
• DISKCOPY destroys information on the destination disk, the disk in the
second drive.
• Running DISKCOMP on the disks after copying tells you if the copy is
correct. (If you used COpy to make a copy, do not use DISKCOMP.)
• You must use compatible disks and disk drives. For example, using a 1.2
Mbyte disk with a 360 Kbyte drive causes an error.

MS-DOS Commands 2-43

DOSMOUNT
External HP extension, Version 3 to present, DOS Coprocessor Only
Redirects a drive letter for use in accessing the HP- UX file system.

Syntax

Restores drive to be a normal drive

Path-prefix for redirected drive
Drive letter redirected to HP-UX
Turn off file name translation
DOSMOUNT [ -8 -v - + ] [ [ -t ] d: [path-prefix] [-] ]
III . Enable the redirector (default)
Disable the redirector
Show version information
1....-_ _ _ _ _ Show redirected status/drives

Examples

Command Result / Action

dosmount e: Redirect drive E to the HP-UX file system
without resetting the path-prefix for E (if any).
dosmount d: \usr\bin Redirect drive D to the HP-UX file system and set
the path-prefix for D to \ usr\ bin.
dosmount -t d: \usr\bin Redirect drive D to the HP-UX file system, set the
path-prefix to \ usr\ bin, and turn off file name
translation on drive D.
dosmount f:- Restore drive F as a normal drive.

2-44 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You must run the REDIR command before your first use of the
DOS MOUNT command.
• When setting up a redirected drive, you can use drive letters D through
Z, subject to the value of the LASTDRIVE directive in CONFIG.SYS.
• You can specify only one redirected drive each time you run DOSMOUNT.
• When you do not specify the path-prefix, the redirected drive uses the
HP-UX root.
• DOSMOUNT uses the HP-UX location set by the path-prefix as the root
of the DOS redirected drive. If path-prefix does not exist in the HP-UX
file system, a File not found error occurs when the redirected drive is
accessed.
• Since path-prefix is an HP-UX path, it need not conform to conventions
for DOS file names. You can use \ or / as directory delimiters. You must
specify the -t option if a path-prefix contains upper-case letters.
• Use the -t option, which turns of file translation fora specified redirected
drive, with HP-UX directories and files having DOS-compatible names.
HP-UX file names that are not valid DOS names are ignored when using
-to
Tips and Hints continue on the next page.

MS-DOS Commands 2-45

 • Concerning HP-UX file name conversion, if an HP-UX file name doesnot
map directly into a valid DOS file name and you did not specify -t for
the drive, the redirector generates a pseudo-name for the file as follows:
o Extensions having 1 to 3 lower-case letters are preserved.
o The first five valid DOS file-name characters are preserved. Non-
valid characters are replaced by a tilde C). The sixth character
is a tilde. The seventh and eighth characters are coded indices to
an internal cache. The following examples show the idea:
longfilename.exe ==> LONGF-xx.EXE
hello.exee ==> hello-xx
ACE ==> ACE---xx
ace ==> ACE

o When a path begins with \ or \ \, the home directory is

prepended to the path as determined by the HOME environment
variable. Nothing is prep ended when the HOME variable does
not exist. The prepending action can create an invalid path,
depending on the value of HOME.

2-46 MS-DOS Commands

This page has no reference material.

MS-DOS Commands 2-47

DOS2UX
External HP extension to DOS
Converts ASCII files from the DOS format to the HP-UX format. (Besides
working in DOS, the command works in HP-UX.)

Syntax
DOS2UX filespec
L The file being converted

Examples

Command Result/ Action

dos2ux autoexec . bat >autoexec. ux Converts a DOS file named
autoexec.bat to the HP-UX format
and redirects the converted output to
a file named autoexec. ux.
type profile I dos2ux >c : . profile. ux The TYPE command in the pipeline
sends the file named profile to
DOS2UX for conversion, and the
converted output from the DOS2UX
command is redirected to a file
named profile. ux in the current
directory on drive C.

2-48 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• HP-UX cannot read DOS ASCII files directly. To use a DOS file in HP-
UX, you need to first use DOS2UX to convert the file. For example, to
use vi to edit a DOS file, you should convert the file and then edit it.
• In most cases, DOS2UX works best with redirection and pipelines.
• Not specifying a file makes DOS2UX accept input from the standard input
device, probably the keyboard.
• Unless redirected or piped, the converted output goes to the standard
output device, probably the display.
• The original file that provides input is not changed.
• To get a more complete picture of converting DOS and HP-UX files, see
the UX2DOS command.

MS-DOS Commands 2-49

ERASE
Internal, Version 1 to present
Removes a file or files from a directory. (Use the information for this command
when using DEL.)

Syntax
ERASE filespec
L The drive, path, file(s), and extension(s) to erase

Examples

Command Result / Action

erase a: *. * Erases all files in the current directory on the disk
in drive A.
erase c: \ tools \ ?ag . * Erases all files having one initial character and ag
with any extension from the directory named tools
in the root directory on drive C (for example,
tag. txt, sag. doc, gag.exe).
erase junk. txt Erases junk. txt from the current directory and
drive.

Tips and Hints

• When you specify *. *, DOS provides the following prompt:

Are you sure (YIN)?

Be sure you know what such a specification will erase. The * wildcard
can produce devastating results. Use DIR to check the files affected by a
specification before using it with ERASE .
• Like most commands that alter files, not specifying the drive and path
uses the current drive and path. Not specifying at least one of a drive,
path, or file causes an error.

2-50 MS-DOS Commands

• You cannot erase a directory, including the current directory and the
parent directory, from a subdirectory. (Use RMDIR to remove a
directory. )
• Technically, ERASE alters the entries in a directory for the removed files
and frees the space they occupied on a disk. If you decide you must get
them back, and before you use the disk for any other operation, you can
sometimes recover the files with special utility programs designed for this
purpose.
• The ERASE command is identical in function to the DEL command.

MS-DOS Commands 2-51

EXE2BIN
External, Version 1.1 to present
Changes EXE files into COM or BIN files, provided the format is acceptable.

Syntax
EXE2BIN jilespec1 [jilespec2]
I L - I- - Drive, path, and name of the COM file
L - -_ _ _ _ _ Drive, path, and name of the EXE file

Examples

Command Result/ Action

exe2bin junk. exe Creates a binary file named
junk. bin from the executable file
named junk. exe.
exe2bin a: \junk. exe c: \utils\junk. com Changes junk. exe in the root
directory on drive A into a COM
file named junk. com in utils in
the root directory on drive C.

2-52 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• EXE2BIN converts executable programs (files having an EXE extension)

to binary image programs (files having BIN or COM extensions). The
binary programs take up less disk space and load faster. You can run
into problenls among versions of DOS by converting programs. Unless
you use a compiler-based language, you probably do not need to use the
command.
• When specifying drive, path, and file names, note the following items:
o Not specifying a drive or path for the source file uses the current
drive and path.
o Not specifying a drive or path for the destination file uses the
current drive and path.
o You must specify a source file to be converted (that is a file having
an EXE extension).
o Not specifying a destination file name uses the name of the source
file and adds the BIN extension. Specifying a destination file name
and not specifying the extension uses BIN for the extension.
• The source file (the file having the EXE extension) must have a format
that follows DOS conventions.

MS-DOS Commands 2-53

EXIT
Internal, Version 3.3
Exits the current command processor, and if a previous command processor
exists, control returns DOS to that processor. (COMMAND. COM is the
command processor for DOS).

Syntax
EXIT

Examples
Just run EXIT as appropriate.

2-54 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• EXIT does not perform any operation when a preVIOUS command

processor does not exist, it merely exits.

MS-DOS Commands 2-55

FASTOPEN
External, Version 3.3
Keeps information about hard disk directories and files in memory so DOS can
quickly find and use files.

Syntax
FASTOPEN d: [=nnn ... ]

I I LThe dots mean you can specify several drives

The number of directory entries held in memory (10
through 999)
The name of the drive FASTOPEN affects

Examples

Command Result / Action

fastopen d: =40 c: =75 Tracks 40 directories and files on drive D; 75 on
drive C.

2-56 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• When specifying drives, note the following items:

o You cannot use FASTOPEN with flexible disk drives.

o You can use FASTOPEN for several hard disk drives using the
syntax for specifying drives and separating them with a space.
The sum of the values for nnn over all specifications cannot exceed
999.
o Not specifying nnn uses 10. If you specify a value, it should be
greater than the deepest level of directories on the hard disk.
• When accessing a directory or file, FASTOPEN records its name and
location. Then, on accessing a recorded directory or file, the access time
is greatly reduced.
• FASTOPEN differs from BUFFERS. BUFFERS speeds up the system
when DOS reads from or writes to a file, while FASTOPEN speeds up
the system when you re-open a file.
• There is no best value for nnn. The default of 10 works well for most
applications. Using a value greater than 200 can bog down the system.
Try to use a value that slightly exceeds the number of subdirectories and
files you use.
• After you install FASTOPEN, you might specify unacceptable drives
or values for nnn. At this point, you must re-start DOS before trying
FASTOPEN with different parameters.
• FASTOPEN uses about 40 bytes of memory for each directory and file it
tracks.

MS-DOS Commands 2-57

Fe
External, Version 3.3
Compares the contents of two files, which can be two text files or two binary files.

Syntax

Abbreviates output
Binary, byte-for-byte comparison
Treat all letters as upper-case
ASCII comparison
Set internal buffer size to n (ASCII)
Compress spaces and tabs
Fe [IA IB Ie IL ILBn IW IT IN Innnn] filespecl filespec2

Do not expand tabs

Display line numbers
See "Tips and Hints"
File being compared
File used for comparison

Examples

Command Result / Action

fc /b c: \util \drill. bin a: \drill. bin Compares two binary files; drill. bin,
which is in utii in the root directory
on drive C with drill. bin, which is in
the root directory on drive A.

2-58 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The options (switches) work as follows:

IA Abbreviates output from a comparison, showing only the first
and last lines of each set of differences and placing an ellipses
between the sets of lines.
IB Does a binary comparison byte for byte, making no attempt to
re-synchronize after a mismatch. Allowed extensions include:
EXE, COM, SYS, OBJ, LIB, and BIN.
IC Directs DOS to treat all letters as upper-case. Use only with
ASCII files (files having only alphanumeric characters and
allowable printing characters).
IL Does an ASCII comparison on both files (this is the default
option for files having extensions other than EXE, COM, SYS,
OBJ, LIB, and BIN).
ILHn Set the internal buffer to n during an ASCII comparison where
the value of n must exceed the number of differing lines by 2.
The value defaults to 100. Having too small a value causes FC
to abort and you get an invalid comparison.
IW Compresses white spaces causes by tabs and extraneous spaces.
Use the option only with ASCII comparisons.
IT Does not expand tabs (default treats tabs as 8 spaces).
The switches continue on the next page

MS-DOS Commands 2-59

 • Continuation of switches:
IN Displays line numbers. Use only with ASCII comparisons.
Innnn Specifies a number of lines that must match after a difference
is found for the files to be considered as matching again.
• FC makes ASCII comparisons line by line. It makes binary comparisons
byte by byte. A command compares the contents of the file specified first
with the file specified second.
• Not specifying drives or paths uses the current drives and paths.
• For ASCII comparisons, output contains the following information:
D File name
D The last matching line preceding a difference.
D The different lines.
D The next matching lines.
• For binary comparisons, output contains the following information:
D The first column shows the position in the files of each pair of
mismatched bytes. The first byte in each file is byte number O.
D The second column shows the values of the mismatched bytes in
Jilespecl in hex.
D The third column shows the values of the mismatched bytes in
Jilespec2 in hex.
D Fe ignores any options entered after the file specifications.

2-60 MS-DOS Commands

This page has no reference information.

MS-DOS Commands 2-61

FDISK
External, Version 3.3
Configures a hard disk for use by DOS. During configuration, FDISK places
partitions on the disk (a partition is an area for storing files).

Syntax
FDISK

Examples

Command Result / Action

fdisk Provides a series of menus that let you configure
your hard disk.

Tips and Hints

• You must create a primary partition on every hard disk in which you
store DOS files. The primary partition can have up to 32 Mbytes. Your
system sees this partition as Drive C.
• You can create an extended partition on a hard disk. If the capacity
of your disk exceeds 32 Mbytes, you must create an extended partition
to use the additional capacity. The extended partition contains the rest
of the drive. You can segment this partition into as many as 23 logical
drives where each drive can contain up to 32 Mbytes. (You need not do
this in the DOS Coprocessor environment, an HP-UX program does this
for you.)
• The interactive menus provided by FDISK let you create primary and
extended partitions. In addition, you can create logical drives, change
the current partition, delete a partition, and display a partition.
• A logical drive acts like a separate hard drive. Logical drives are named
E:, F:, G:, and so on up to 23 drives.

2-62 MS-DOS Commands

• The primary partition must be current to start DOS from a hard drive.
But you may want to start your system with an operating system installed
on the extended partition. To do this, use the "Change the Active
Partition" menu.
• Deleting a partition destroys the information contained on it. Backup or
move the files on the partition if you want to keep them.
• Displaying partition data provides information about its status (active-
inactive), type (DOS-nonDOS), starting cylinder, ending cylinder, and
size.
• Selecting "Next Fixed Disk Drive" moves you to the next physical hard
disk on your system, if you have more than one.

MS-DOS Commands 2-63

FIND
External, Version 2 to present
Given a string and file, FIND displays the lines in the file that contain the string.

Syntax
FIND [IV Ie IN] "string" [filespec ... ]
I L Implies more files
L The file to be searched
"---------The search string
L..-----------See "Tips and Hints"

Examples

Command Result/ Action

find "Jones" ph-1st. txt Finds lines containing Jones in ph-lst.txt.
find In "Smith" a: \ph-1st. txt Searches ph-lst. txt in the root directory
on drive A for lines containing Smith and
displays the lines along with the line
numbers.

2-64 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The options (switches) work as follows:

IV Displays lines in a specified file not containing string.
Ie Counts the number of times string appears in a file and displays
that value, but does not display the lines containing string.
IN Displays the line number in front of each line in the specified
file that contains string.
• When specifying a drive, path, and file, note the following items:
D Not specifying a drive or path uses the current drive or path.
D You can specify nlore than one file, separating each file with a
space.
D Not specifying a file causes FIND to expect input from the
keyboard.
D You cannot use wildcards in the file specification.
• Options must appear between FIND and string.
• You must enclose string in double-quotes (for example, "John"). To
include double-quotes in the string, double quote them and the string
(for example, ""John""). Case is important. You can use numbers and
special characters in string.
• You can redirect output to a suitable device. For example:
c:\find "503" b:\zip.txt >prn

finds all lines in a zip-code file having 503 and sends the lines to a printer.

MS-DOS Commands 2-65

FORMAT
External, Version 1 to present
Initializes a disk so it can contain files and be used by DOS. FORMAT checks a
disk for defective tracks and can place DOS on a disk. (To format a 3.5 inch 720
Kbyte disk for use with an HP 150 computer, use FOR150 instead of FORMAT.)

Syntax
FORMAT d: [IS /1 /8 /V /B /4 /N:ss /T:ttt]
I I I N umber of tracks per side
Number of sectors per track
Formats low-capacity disks in
1.2 Mbyte drive
Formats for backward compat-
ibility
Write volume label on disk

~- Formats disk with 8 sectors/track (low-capacity

disks)
1 - -_ _ _ Formats single sided (low-capacity disks)
L - -_ _ _ _ Copies DOS system files to disk
1 - -_ _ _ _ _ Drive containing disk to be formatted

Examples

Command Result / Action

format a: Formats the disk in drive A. (This example shows how to
format flexible disks used in drive A for storing data files.)

2-66 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The options (switches) work as follows:

/S Copies the two hidden system files plus COMMAND.COM on
a disk so you can start up DOS from the disk.
/1 Formats a single side of a 5.25 inch flexible disk (160/180
Kbyte). Do not use the switch with hard disks, high capacity
flexible disks (1.2 Mbytes), or 3.5 inch flexible disks (720
Kbytes or 1.44 Mbytes).
/8 Formats a disk with 8 sectors per track (160/180 Kbyte
single-sided disks or 320/360 double-sided disks). Do not
use the switch with hard disks, high capacity flexible disks
(1.2 Mbytes), or 3.5 inch flexible disks (720 Kbytes or 1.44
Mbytes).
/V Writes a volume label to the disk. FORMAT prompts you to
enter a volume label after formatting the disk.
/B Formats an eight-sector flexible disk, leaving places in the
directory for any version of DOS, but does not copy the
operating system to the disk.
/4 Formats a single-sided or double-sided flexible disk in a 1.2
Mbyte drive.
/N:ss The switch specifies the number of sectors per track. Use /N:9
to format a 720 Kbyte disk.
/T:ttt The switch specifies the nUlllber of tracks per side. Use /T:80
to format a 720 Kbyte disk.

MS-DOS Commands 2-67

 • The following options do not work together:
o IV, /N:ss, /T;ttt, or /S with /B
o IV, /N:ss, or /T;ttt with /8
o /1, /4, /8, /B, /N:ss, or /t:ttt with a hard disk drive.
• FORMAT destroys information left on previously formatted disks. (Do
not format a disk containing useful files.)
• Not specifying a drive formats the disk in the current drive.
• Except when using a flexible disk as the destination disk in a DISKCOPY
or when using a disk in a BACKUP with IF, you must format a new disk
before you can use it.
• Unless directed otherwise by an option, DOS formats a disk to its
maximum capacity.
• To make a flexible disk usable with all versions of DOS, use the /B and
/1 options. (This reduces the capacity of the disk to 140 Kbytes.)
• If you specify the /S option when the current disk does not contain a
boot able DOS, FORMAT prompts you to insert a DOS disk in the current
drive before the formatting begins.
• When formatting a hard disk that has a volullle label, DOS prompts you
to enter the volume label. DOS aborts the formatting if you cannot enter
the exact label.
• When formatting a hard disk not having a volume label, FORMAT
prompts you about proceeding. Answering Y formats the disk, answering
N aborts.
• The /4 option has no effect in the DOS Coprocessor or SoftPC
environments. It is intended to format double-density flexible disks in
a 1.2 Mbyte drive, which does not exist in these environments.
• Do not format any disk associated with a virtual disk drive.
• Do not format any disk affected by an ASSIGN, JOIN, or SUBST.

2-68 MS-DOS Commands

Exit Codes
FORMAT can display the following exit codes:
o Last format successfully completed
1 Not defined
2 Not defined
3 Aborted by user via I CTRL HBreak I
4 Aborted due to an error
5 Aborted due to an N response to a prompt

MS-DOS Commands 2-69

FOR150
External HP extension to DOS, Version 3.2 to present
Prepares a 720 Kbyte 3.5 inch flexible disk for use with the HP 150 computer.

Syntax
FOR150 d: [IV]
I L Prompts for writing a volume label on a disk
L The drive containing the disk to be formatted

Examples

Command Result / Action

for150 a: Iv Formats a 3.5 inch disk 720 Kbyte disk in drive A.
Prompts for specification of a volume label.

2-70 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The comnland works only on 3.5 inch, double-sided disks intended for use
in an HP 150 computer.
• The command cannot put the DOS system on a disk. A disk formatted
with this command cannot be used to start DOS.
• A disk must have been previously formatted with a FORMAT command.
You cannot format a new disk with a FOR150 command.

MS-DOS Commands 2-71

GRAFTABL
External, Version 3 to present
Loads tables into memory for additional character sets that can be displayed on
the Color/Graphics Adapter (CGA) in graphics mode.

Syntax
GRAFTABL [codepage /STATUS]
I L - I- - - Displays number of active codepage
L - .- - - - - 3-digit number of the code page for the
display

Examples

Command Result/ Action

graftabl 863 Loads the code page for Canada.
graftabl With no specification, the command loads code
page 437 (the United States).
graftabl? Shows the options for GRAFTABL.
graftabl / status Displays the number of the current code page.

2-72 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Use only· one of the two options per command (for example, do not use
graftabl 437 /status in one command line).
• See MODE CODEPAGE for information about code pages.
• Load GRAFTABL to display characters in the ASCII range of 128 to 255
when you are in the all-points-addressable mode on the Color/Graphics
Adapter.
• GRAFTABL has no effect when you are in text mode. Do not use
the command unless you have a Color/Graphics Adapter being used in
medium- or high-resolution mode.
• You must restart DOS to cancel GRAFTABL.
• The displayed exit codes include:
o GRAFTABL installed successfully for the first time.
1 The code page was changed. When not specifying a new code
page, there is an existing code page.
2 GRAFTABL is installed and no previous code page was
installed.
3 Incorrect parameter, no change in GRAFTABL.
4 You have an incorrect version of DOS.

MS-DOS Commands 2-73

GRAPHICS
External, Version 2 to present
Prints the contents of a graphics screen on a printer when you use the
Color / Graphics Adapter (CG A). (See note in "Tips and Hints")

Syntax
GRAPHICS [printer] [/R /B /LeD /P=port]
I I Sets LPT port (default=LPTl)
Prints from Liquid Crystal Dis-
play
L..--_ _ _ _ _ Prints the background color
L..--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ Prints colors as they appear on
display
' - - - - - - - - - - - - Type of printer (colorl, color4,
color8, compact, graphics, ther-
mal)

Examples

Command Result/ Action

graphics /r The /R makes the command print colors exactly as they
appear on the display. After executing the command, type
I Print Screen I or I Shift HPrint Screen I to print the contents of
the screen.

2-74 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• NOTE: Do not use GRAPHICS with HP printers in HP mode. Instead,

install and use the Print Screen Utility described in the Using the Multiple
Character Set Utilities manual.
• After you run a GRAPHICS command, use I Print Screen I or I Shift ~
I Print Screen I to send the display to the printer.
• Printers you can specify include:
COLOR! An IBM Color Printer with a black ribbon.
COLOR4 An IBM Color Printer with an RGB (red, green, blue,
and black) ribbon.
COLOR8 An IBM Color Printer with a CMY (cyan, magenta,
yellow, and black) ribbon.
COMPACT A Compact Printer
GRAPHICS The default printer (the one the system uses when you
do not specify a printer) is an IBM Graphics Printer.
THERMAL An IBM Convertible Printer.
• Switches work as follows:
/R Prints colors as they appear on the display. Without the
option, black prints as white and white prints as black.
/E Also prints the background color. Without the option, the
background color is not printed. The option works only with
COLOR4 and COLOR8 printers.
/P=port Specifies the parallel printer port. The default value is 1.
Other values include 2 and 3.
/LCD Prints from the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the IBM
portable computer.
• Not using the /R switch, in essence, prints an inverse image of the screen.

MS-DOS Commands 2-75

 • In text mode, it takes about 30 seconds to dump a screen. In graphics
mode, it takes up to 3 minutes to dump a screen.
• In 320 by 200 color graphics mode with the COLORl or COLOR8 printer
types, the screen prints in up to 4 shades of gray. In 640 by 200 graphics
mode, the screen prints sideways on the printer. Other graphics modes
print normally.
• You must restart DOS to deactivate GRAPHICS. In addition, each
GRAPHICS command increases the size of DOS by about 3.3 Kbytes.
Running the command many times can run you out of memory.

2-76 MS-DOS Commands

This page has no reference material.

MS-DOS Commands 2-77

JOIN
External, Version 3.1 to present
Produces a single directory structure by connecting a disk drive to an empty
subdirectory in the root directory of a second disk drive.

Syntax
JOIN [d1:] [d2:\directory] [/D]

I I L Switch used to disconnect

The host subdirectory when connecting
The host drive when connecting
L - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ The guest drive when connecting or discon-
necting

Examples

Command Result / Action

join a: c:\projects Joins drive A to the subdirectory named projects
in the root directory on drive C. (This is a typical
example.)
join a: /d Disconnects drive A from the host directory.
c:\join Shows the current structure. For example:
A: => C:\projects
B: => C:\data

2-78 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The major uses of JOIN are to:

1. connect two hard disks, which makes DOS think you have a very
large hard disk; or
2. connect a virtual (RAM) disk to a "real" disk.
You can join other combinations of disks, but this is seldom necessary.
In general, joining two disks can make other aspects of using DOS more
difficult (for example, backing up files).
• Joining two drives makes the guest drive appear to be a part of the
subdirectory on the host drive. You can access the guest drive only
through the host subdirectory. Not using this path causes an error.
• You must specify a guest disk drive name (the dl:). This drive must not
be the current drive.
• Not giving a host disk drive uses the current disk drive.
• You must specify a host subdirectory that is in the root directory. The
host subdirectory can be the current directory. If the subdirectory does
not exist, JOIN creates it. If the subdirectory exists, it must be empty.
• The guest drives must not be affected by ASSIGN or SUBST commands.
• You should not use the BACKUP, RESTORE, FORMAT, DISKCOPY, or
DISKCOMP commands when two drives are joined. The DIR command
works, but reports bytes free only for the host disk.
• While two drives are joined, CHKDSK processes the host drive, leaving
the guest drive alone.

MS-DOS Commands 2-79

KEYB
External, Version 1 to present
Changes DOS so it supports a non-United States keyboard and codepages. (For
this command, see the "Tips and Hints" section before you do anything. This
should help you avoid errors.)

Syntax
KEYB [keycode, codepage, filespec]
~ Drive and path to file (KEYBOARD.SYS)
I. A 3-digit code page (437,850,863, or 865)
I A 2-character key code (See "Tips and
Hints")

Examples

Command Result/ Action

keyb CF I 863 ,e: \KEYBOARD. SYS Changes the handler so it supports the
Canadian keyboard and code page.
keyb Displays the current keyboard and code
pages.

2-80 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The key code values include:

Country Code Country Code

Australia US Netherlands DT
Belgium BE Norway NO
English Canada CE French Canada CF
Denmark DK Sweden SV
Finland SU French Swiss SF
France FR German Swiss SD
Germany GR United Kingdom UK
Italy IT United States US
Latin America LS Spain SP

MS-DOS Commands 2-81

 • A specified codepage must be compatible" with keycode. Acceptable
combinations of code pages for key codes include:
Codepage Acceptable Keycodes
437 BE, FR, GR, IT, LS, DT, SP, SU, SV, UK, US
850 Any keyboard code
863 CF, CE
865 DK or NO
• Do not use KEYB from earlier versions of DOS with DOS 3.3.
• Not specifying codepage uses the default code page for your country (that
is, the code page established by the COUNTRY directive in CONFIG.SYS
or, if you did not use the COUNTRY directive, the DOS default code
page). This possibly is not what you want. You can specify 850, which
works with all keyboard codes.
• You should specify KEYBOARD.SYS. If you don't, DOS looks for the
file in the root directory of the current disk. If you don't give the drive
or path, DOS uses the current drive or path. Beyond this, DOS uses the
file name and extension to search for the file.
• Executing KEYB without parameters displays the active keyboard and
code pages.
• Depending on the country, KEYB reassigns some characters and adds
additional characters. This can change the layout of your keyboard, which
means you probably need to accommodate new typing habits.
• Once a new keyboard layout is active, you can switch back to an
American-English layout by typing I CTRL ~ooIJI]' Later, type I CTRL ~
oo@] to get back to the originally active layout.

2-82 MS-DOS Commands

Exit Codes

o KEYB ran successfully.

1 Invalid key code, code page, or another syntax error.
2 Bad or missing KEYCODE.SYS file.
3 KEYB could not create a keyboard table in memory.
4 KEYB could not communicate with CON (the console).
5 The specified code page was not prepared.
6 Either: the internal translation table for a specified code page was not
found; or the values of keycode and codepage are incompatible.

MS-DOS Commands 2-83

LABEL
External, Version 1 on
Creates, changes, or deletes a volume label for a disk.

Syntax
LABEL [d: volume_label]
~ Name of the volume label
I
L - .- - - - - - Letter designating the disk drive to be labeled

Examples

Command Action/Result
label b:main_drive Makes MAIN_DRIVE the volume label for the
disk in drive B.
LABEL Since you did not specify a drive or volume label
such as B:MYDISK), the command displays the
volume for the current drive and asks if you want
to enter a volume label.
• Entering a volume label changes the
existing label.
• Just typing I Return I asks if you want to
delete the current volume label. Entering
Y removes the existing label; entering N
exits LABEL, leaving the volume label
intact.

2-84 MS-DOS Commands

Errors/Problems

You use a non-DOS disk DOS reports an error arid does not label
the disk.
You enter an invalid volume label DOS displays a warning and asks for a
valid volume label.

Tips and Hints

• Specifying dc, pathc, d:, and volume_label, provides a sure means

of creating a volume label with no interaction and without making
assumptions about the state of the system.
• A volume label can be used by commands such as DIR, TREE, and
CHKDSK.
• LABEL provides security when using FORMAT because the command
requests a label to confirm your intent.
• Use 1 to 11 characters for volume_label as follows:
o Upper- and lower-case letters and numbers 0 to 9
o Space
o The special characters $ # & @ ! _ ) _ ( - }A {

• Not specifying the drive, d:, ahead of volume_label changes the name of
the disk in the current disk drive. Specifying the drive is safer.
• Do not label a SUBSTituted or ASSIGNed disk drive because DOS will
label the real disk drive instead of the one you expect.
• Use the VOL command to see the existing label on a disk.

MS-DOS Commands 2-85

MKDIR or MD
Internal, Version 2 on
Creates a directory under the current or specified directory.

Syntax
MKDIR [d:path]\directoryname

II L
Narne of directory you want to make
Path to the directory
Narne of the disk drive containing the direc-
tory

Examples

Using MKDIR by Itself

Command Action/Result
mkdir c: \john\ltrs\personal Makes a directory named personal on drive C
under the path named \john\itrs.
md junk.dir Makes a directory named junk on the current
drive under the current directory. The directory
has an extension named dir.

Using MKDIR With ASSIGN, JOIN, or SUBST

Command Sequence Action/Result

ASSIGN A = B Makes pie_cht under \tools on B (not on A
MKDIR A:\tools\pie_cht because MKDIR uses the ASSIGNed disk).

JOIN A: c: \old Makes stuff under the root on A. During the

MKDIR A: \old\stuff JOIN, stuff is a directory on C under \ old. When
JOIN ends, stuff disappears from C but remains
under the root on A. The SUBST command works
similarly.

2-86 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The directoryname can have 1 to 8 characters (e.g. jack, #123, ace-rpts).

You can append a 3-character extension (e.g. new_doe.dir). Do not have
a space and avoid using + / = \ ' : ? ; * [ > ] < . I
A

• Do not create a directory having the same name as an existing file (e.g.
reports (a file) and reports (a directory)). You could have reports. txt (a
file) and reports (a directory). You could also have ltrs.txt and ltrs.dir.
• A maximum path can have 63 characters including backslashes. Try to
make an efficient and comprehensible set of directories.
• A backslash must separate path from direetoryname (e.g. given \ users\ bill
and mise, you have \ users\ bilf\ mise).
• Specifying d: but not path makes a directory under the current directory
on the disk drive. Specifying path but not d: makes the directory under
the path on the current disk drive.
• MKDIR can work with an ASSIGN, JOIN, or SUBST. Be careful. See
the information about these commands before using them with MKDIR.
You can easily create directories where you do not want them.
• Use RMDIR to remove directories; TREE to see existing directories, and
APPEND or PATH to access other directories.

MS-DOS Commands 2-87

MODE (General Information and Errors)
The MODE command is eight commands in one. In general, the command
sets the mode of operation for the printers, video display, and asynchronous
communications adapter or it controls code page switching for the console and
printer. You might want to include MODE commands in AUTOEXEC.BAT files
depending on how you want applications to function.

Executing MODE
You typically execute MODE with a parameter such as LPTx:, COMy:,
PREPARE, or SELECT. This means you need to know when to use MODE
as-well-as how to use it. Besides using this reference material, read appropriate
sections in the user's guide because some versions of MODE need to be executed
in specific ways in a specific order.

Using a Variation of the MODE Command

1. To use a particular variation of the MODE command, examine the

following list to find the variation you need. (You can skim the eight
reference sections if you wish.)
2. Then, find the section having reference information for the variation.
3. Work through the section according to your need for information.

2-88 MS-DOS Commands

Finding Information About MODE
The reference information appears in sections because the MODE command
is complex. This initial section discusses general information. Eight following
sections discuss each variation as described in the following list. Study the list
to see what MODE does, and then move to the corresponding section to find
information.
• Set parallel printer characteristics (MODE LPT).
• Set display adapter characteristics (MODE display-type).
• Set asynchronous communications adapter features (MODE COM).
• Redirect printing from a parallel printer to a serial printer (MODE
LPTx=COMy).
• Prepare a code page for use (MODE device CODEPAGE PREPARE).
• Select a code page for use (MODE device CODEPAGE SELECT).
• Reestablish the current code page (MODE device CODEPAGE RE-
FRESH).
• Display code page status (MODE device CODEPAGE !STATUS).

MS-DOS Commands 2-89

MODE (Set Parallel Printer)
External, Version 1 to current
Sets IBM and Epson-compatible printer characteristics.
/
Syntax
MODE LPTx: [cpl, lpi, P]

II LContinuous retries on time-out errors.

overrides during printing.)
(Ctrl-C

Number of lines per inch (6 or 8).

Number of characters per inch (80 or 132).
Printer number (1, 2, or 3). The colon is optional.

Examples

Command Result / Action

mode Ipt3: 132, 6, P The Ipt3: 132, 8, P uses the IBM-compatible
printer on the 3rd parallel port, prints 132
characters per line at 8 lines per inch, and tries
to print despite time-out errors (for example,
jammed paper).
mode Ipt If you do not specify a value for x in LPTx:,
MODE prompts for a parallel port number (1,
2, or 3) because this value must be given. To
include options, type a colon (:), press the space
bar, and type the options, separating each one
with a comma (for example, : 80, 6). Without
P, a time-out error makes the computer not retry
printing.

2-90 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints
• MODE LPTx: controls IBM Matrix and Graphics printers and all Epson-
compatible printers. It might not work properly or at all on other printers.
• The characters-per-line and lines-per-inch options work only with IBM
and Epson-compatible printers.
• The following items apply when using options:
o You must provide a printer number for the parallel port.
o Except for the printer number, an invalid option or skipped option
has no effect on its existing state.
o Besides the printer number, type a comma for an option you want
to skip (for example, : 80, , P skips lines per inch).
• Concerning the P option for continuous retries:
o Use I CTRL HBreak I to abort a continuous retry.
o To cancel continuous retries, execute MODE LPT without the P.
o If you print to a deselected printer, the computer does not send a
time-out error. It loops internally (appearing locked up) until the
printer is selected (for example, turned on).
• Changing the column width sends printer-control code specifying normal
font for 80 characters and condensed font for 132 characters.
• Changing the lines per inch sends printer-control code specifying 6 or 8
lines per inch and also sends printer-control code specifying the lines per
page (66 lines for 6 lines per inch and 88 lines for 8 lines per inch).
• A MODE LPTx: cancels a MODE LPTx: = COMy:.

MS-DOS Commands 2-91

MODE (Set Display Adapter/Display Characteristics)
External, Version 2 to current
Switches the display adapter between the monochrome display and a graphics
adapter / array on a two-display system. It also sets the characteristics of the
graphics adapter/array. The adapter/array includes: a color/graphics adapter,
an enhanced color/graphics adapter, or a video graphics array.

Syntax
MODE dt
or
MODE [dt,] s, [T]
I I L Display type (40, 80, bw40, bw80, co40, co80, mono)
Shifts the graphics display right or left (R or L)
Aligns graphics screen with one-line test pattern

Examples

Command Result / Action

mode co80, r, t Sets the graphics display to 80 characters per line
with color. Shifts the display to the right and
provides a test pattern. (See section on Tips).
mode bw40 Sets the graphics display to 40 characters without
color.
mode mono Makes the monochrome display active.

2-92 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• A monitor connected to an adapter or array is color or monochrome.

• When using MODE dt, s, T, you must specify s as R or L. When using
MODE dt, you must specify the dt (display type) as follows:
40 Sets graphics display to 40 characters per line.
80 Sets graphics display to 80 characters per line.
bw40 Makes graphics display active, 40 characters, no color.
bw80 Makes graphics display active, 80 characters, no color.
co40 Makes graphics display active, 40 characters, color.
co80 Makes graphics display active, 80 characters, color.
mono Makes the monochrome display active, no graphics.
• Not setting an appropriate display causes an Invalid parameter error.
• Setting color does not automatically produce color, but programs using
color can produce a color display.
• Executing any valid form of the command clears the display.
• The s parameter works only with the color graphics adapter. You get an
error for the monochrome adapter. In 40-column mode, the display shifts
1 character; in 80-column mode, it shifts 2 characters.
• The T option shows a test pattern with any graphics adapter (Convert-
ible, Enhanced Graphics Adapter, Video Graphics Array).
• Using sand T shifts the display, shows the test pattern, and DOS asks
if the display is aligned. Entering N repeats the shifting and prompting
process. Entering Y returns to DOS.

MS-DOS Commands 2-93

MODE (Set Asynchronous Communications)
External, Version 1 to current
Controls the protocol characteristics of a COMport.

Syntax
MODE COMy: baud[,parity,databits,stopbits,P]

~
~ Retries on time-out
Number of stop bits (1 or 2)
Number of data bits (7 or 8)

1 - -_ _ Parity checking (N =none, O=odd, E=even)

L . . -_ _ _ _ Baud rate
L...-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ Adapter number (1,2,3, or 4). Colon optional

Examples

Command Result/ Action

mode com2: 1200. N. 7. 1 The com2: 1200, N, 7, 1 uses adapter number
2 at 1200 baud with no parity checking, 7 data
bits, and 1 stop bit. Not specifying P makes the
computer not retry on time-out errors.
mode com The command prompts for the adapter number
(1, 2, 3, or 4), which you must specify. You must
provide a baud rate (typically 300, 1200, or 2400),
but you do not need to provide additional options.
To add options: type a colon, press the space
bar, and include values for options you want,
separating each with a comma.

2-94 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• When using options, note the following items:

D You must provide an adapter number (a value of 1, 2, 3, or 4 for
y in COMy:), a space, and a baud rate (110, 150,300,600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200. Check the device documentation. You
can enter just the first two digits; for example, 24 for 2400). (Do
not use 19200 baud in the SoftPC environment.) If you type a
colon, it must immediately follow the value for y with no space.
D Except for the adapter number and baud rate, entering an invalid
option has no effect, but you do get the message:
Invalid parameter

See the earlier section named "Mode (General Information and

Errors)" see how to solve the problem.
D If you do not want to change an option, enter a comma for
its value (for example, mode com4: 2400, • 7, 1, P skips the
parity option .
• When the adapter is set for continuous retries and a device is not ready,
the computer appears to be locked up. Abort this loop by executing
I CTRL HBreak I.

MS-DOS Commands 2-95

MODE (Redirect Printing: Parallel to Serial)
External, Version 2 to current
Makes DOS print to a serial printer instead of to a parallel printer. Printing
normally goes to a parallel printer.

Syntax
MODE LPTx: [= COMy:]
I 1- y: is the async. comm. adpt. no. (1,2,3, or 4)
L - x: is the parallel printer number (1, 2, or 3)
(The colons are optional)

Examples

Command Result / Action

mode Iptl: = com4: Stops printing to the parallel printer at 1 and
prints instead to the serial printer at 4. To use
the command, you first have to know the numbers
you selected during configuration of DOS for
the parallel and serial printers. (See "Tips and
Hints" .)

2-96 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Use this command when your system has only a serial printer or when
your system has two printers and you want to print to the serial printer.
• You must use a valid number for the parallel and serial printer.
• After you execute the command, output from executing I Shift HPrtSc I goes
to the serial printer.
• Use MODE COMy: to set up the serial adapter used for the serial printer
before you use MODE LPTx: = COMy: to redirect printing.
• Cancel the command and return printing to the parallel printer by
executing MODE LPTx: where x: is the parallel printer number you
used in MODE LPTx: = COMy:.

MS-DOS Commands 2-97

MODE (Prepare Code Page for Use)
External, Version 3.3
Prepares (chooses) the code pages used with a device when you need to make
DOS international. (This is a complex command; read the "Tips and Hints"
before you do anything.)

Syntax
MODE device CODEPAGE PREPARE = ([ codepage, codepage, ... ] [page_filespec])

The parameters work as follows:

device The device name for codepage:
CON: The console.
PRN: The first parallel printer.
LPTx: The 1st, 2nd, or 3rd parallel printer where
x: is 1, 2, or 3.
codepage The number of the code page used with device:
437 United States
850 Multilingual
863 Canadian
865 Denmark and Norway
page_filespec The disk drive having the code page information. The path to
the file having the code page information if it is different from
the path having MODE (for example, \c_pages). The name of
the file having the code page information. Current code page
files include the following:
4201. cpi IBM ProPrinter
5202 . cpi IBM Quietwriter ™ III printer
ega. cpi EGA or VGA displays

2-98 MS-DOS Commands

Examples
Study the following example and see the following paragraph for an explanation:
mode con codepage prepare = (850. 863) c:\ega.cpi

Prepares a code page for the console using multilingual and Canadian fonts. The
command looks for EGAjVGA displays file,ega.cpi, in the root directory on drive
C.
Here is a second example:
mode Iptl cp prep = ( .. 437) c:\4201.cpi

The example shows how to replace one code page and retain previous code pages.
The 437 code page replaces the code page held in the 3rd position; in this case,
you have an IBM ProPrinter connected to the first parallel port using the IBM
ProPrinter information file in the root directory for drive C.
Tips and Hints appear on the following page.

MS-DOS Commands 2-99

Tips and Hints

• Use 1-10DE CODEPAGE PREPARE to prepare code pages that set the
fonts for printers, the console keyboard, and the display. Execute the
command before executing the MODE CODEPAGE SELECT subcom-
mand.
• The IBM Quietwriter III printer is an exception because cartridges hold
the font information. No MODE CODEPAGE PREPARE command is
required when a cartridge has the required code page and the code page
has been specified to the PRINTER.SYS driver.
• Memory holds prepared code pages in the specified order. Executing
additional MODE CODEPAGE PREPARE commands replaces code
pages only in the corresponding positions.
• You must specify device, CODEPAGE, and PREPARE. You can substi-
tute CP and PREP, respectively.
• You must specify at least one code page. Separate additional code pages
by commas and enclose the list in parentheses.

2-100 MS-DOS Commands

• You cannot have more code pages than the value of added_codepage
specified to the appropriate device driver.
• When adding or replacing code pages, enter a comma for any previously
specified codepage you do not want to change.
• Do not use hardware code pages (the page given to DISPLAY .SYS for
the console and PRINTER.SYS for printers).
• Unless you specify paths for MODE and pagefile.ext, DOS uses the current
drive and path.
• You must specify the name of the information file of the code page,
pagefile.ext. You must use the extension if the file has one.
• Specifying an invalid code page number or and invalid file, removes all
current code pages in the same position as the code pages specified in the
command.

MS-DOS Commands 2-101

MODE (Select Code Page for Use)
External, Version 3.3
Activates a prepared code page used with a device.

Syntax
MODE device CODEPAGE SELECT = codepage

The parameters work as follows:

device The device name for chosen codepage:
CON: The console.
PRN : The first parallel printer.
LPTx: The 1st, 2nd, or 3rd parallel printer: x: is 1, 2, or
3.
codepage The number of the code page for fonts used with the device:
437 United States
850 Multilingual
863 Canadian
865 Denmark and Norway

2-102 MS-DOS Commands

Examples

Command Result / Action

mode con codepage select = 863 Selects a code page for the console using
the Canadian font. The selected code
page, 863, must be part of a previously
executed MODE CODEPAGE PREPARE
command or be the hardware code page for
the adapter/array.
mode lpt1 cp sel = 850 Activates the code page for the multilingual
font for use with the printer attached to the
first parallel port.

Tips and Hints

• You must specify device, CODEPAGE, and SELECT. You can substitute
CP and SEL, respectively.
• The specified code page must be either:
1. part of a MODE CODEPAGE PREPARE for a device; or
2. the hardware code page specified to the device driver.
• MODE SELECT activates code pages for individual devices. Use the
CHCP command to activate the code pages for available devices .
.. MODE SELECT completes the downloading of any software font to a
device. The IBM Quietwriter III printer is an exception because it uses
cartridges. When you select a code page, the printer beeps. Make sure
the appropriate cartridge is in the printer because DOS cannot check this.
Using an inappropriate cartridge can print nonsense characters.
• MODE SELECT activates only a prepared code page or reactivates a
hardware code page.

MS-DOS Commands 2-103

Tips and Hints

• You must specify device, CODEPAGE, and REFRESH. You can substi-
tute CP and REF, respectively.
• MODE SELECT completes the downloading and reactivation of any
software font to a device. Therefore, use the command when you turn
a printer OFF and ON or after a program scrambles the display.
• If you don't give a code page, MODE REFRESH uses the last selected
code page for the device.

MS-DOS Commands 2-105

MODE (Display Code Page Status)
External, Version 3.3
Displays the status of code pages for a device.

Syntax
MODE device CODEPAGE /STATUS

I I'--- - A switch for displaying status.

L - .- - - - - - - - - The name of the device for reestablished
code pages. (CON:, PRN:, or LPTx: x =
1, 2, or 3)

Examples

Command Result / Action

mode con codepage /status Displays the code page status for the
console.
mode Iptl cp Displays the status of the printer
attached to the 1st parallel port. Since
you did not include /STATUS option, the
command assumes you want the status to
be displayed.

2-106 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You must specify device and CODEPAGE. /STATUS is optional. You

can substitute CP and /STA, respectively.
• Including /STATUS in a command displays:
1. the active code page, or shows that no code page is selected;
2. the hardware code page, or pages;
3. any prepared code pages; and
4. available positions for additional prepared code pages.
The displayed information is self-explanatory.
• If the status implies that you have a problem, use other MODE commands
to solve it. For example, suppose the display shows this message:
No codepage has been SELECTED

In this case, the device is using the hardware code page and will use this
page until you use MODE with SELECT or you use CHCP to select a
different code page.

MS-DOS Commands 2-107

MORE
External, Version 2 to present, Series 300 and 800
Displays output on your screen 24 lines at a time pausing if necessary. Input
comes from the standard input device (usually the keyboard) or a redirected
source (usually a file).

Syntax
MORE

Examples

Command Result/ Action

more With no redirection to provide input, the cursor
drops down on the display, waiting for you to type
something. Typing echoes the characters on the
display until you execute I CTRL HBreak I. (This is
not usually an effective way to use MORE.)
more < letter The < redirects the input to MORE. This means
that the file named letter provides the input to
MORE; and MORE outputs the lines in letter,
pausing when the screen is full.
dir I sort I more This entry has two pipes, one between DIR and
SORT, and another between SORT and MORE.
1. The output from DIR goes to SORT.
2. The output from SORT, a sorted list of
files, goes to MORE.
3. MORE displays the sorted files.

2-108 MS-DOS Commands

Tips, Hints, and Details

• As a DOS filter, MORE accepts input and displays it on· a screen one line
at a time. When the output exceeds the size of the display, you see this
message:
-- more --

Pressing a key displays succeeding input, pausing whenever the screen

fills up. This continues until all input to MORE is displayed. Then, you
see this message:
Press any key to continue

• One screenful means 40 or 80 characters per line and 23 lines. The

command wraps lines that exceed the current line length. When
necessary, the command reserves two lines at the bottom of a screen to
display a message.
• MORE works well when used in pipes or with redirection because you can
manipulate a source of data and then see the filtered output a screenful
at a time.

MS-DOS Commands 2-109

MOUSE
External HP extension to DOS, DOS Coprocessor only
Loads emulation support for a mouse. Once loaded, the standard Series 300
HP-HIL mouse emulates a Microsoft mouse in DOS applications.

Syntax
MOUSE [/Cn ISn IHn IVn IDn]
See "Tips and Hints" for descriptions of the options.

Examples

Command Result / Action

mouse /s30 Loads emulation support for a mouse, and sets the
horizontal and vertical sensitivity to 30 in a range
from a to 100.

Tips and Hints

• Before you run a MOUSE command, you must assign the mouse to a
COM port via the Device Configuration Menu (when you install DOS)
or the dos. en! file. The following entry shows how you could assign the
mouse to COM2 by modifying the COM2 line in dos.cnf:
COM2 MOUSE:/dev/locator

Restart DOS after modifying the line.

• The following line removes the mouse driver from memory:
mouse off

• The mouse emulation program increases the resident size of DOS and
remains in memory until you restart DOS.
• Including a MOUSE command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file loads
support for the mouse each time you start up DOS.

2-110 MS-DOS Commands

• When you do not run a windowing system, DOS takes possession of the
mouse when you start up DOS.
• When you run a windowing system, check the documentation for your
system to determine how HP-UX and DOS share the mouse. You typically
give possession of the mouse to DOS by moving the pointer to the border
of the DOS window and pressing the right button on the mouse. On
getting the popup menu, highlight the mouse option and press the right
button again. To return the mouse to HP-UX, move the mouse pointer
rapidly in a single direction, or type ~ followed by [M] to select the
Release Mouse option in the DOS Coprocessor Main Menu.
• The following items describe how to use the options:
/Cn Indicates the port currently assigned to the mouse. Use /C1 for
COM1, and so on, up to 3. Using the option greatly reduces the
time required to load support for the mouse.
/Bn Sets the horizontal and vertical sensitivity of the mouse where n
ranges from a to 100.
/Hn Sets the horizontal sensitivity of the rnouse where n ranges from
a to 100.
/Vn Sets the vertical sensitivity of the mouse where n ranges from a
to 100.
/Dn Sets the double-speed threshold, which determines the speed at
which the cursor's motion is doubled on the screen. The value of
n ranges from a to 100.

MS-DOS Commands 2-111

NLSFUNC
External, Version 3.3
Provides support in DOS for extended country information and lets you use
CH CP (a command for changing code pages for many devices).

Syntax
NLSFUNC [filespec]
L Drive, path, and file containing country information
(COUNTRY.SYS in DOS 3.3)

Examples

Command Result / Action

nlsfunc Without a specification, NLSFUNC does not
change the path DOS uses for look for a file
containing extended country information.
nlsfunc c: \bin\country. sys NLSFUNC finds country.sys on drive C in bin
under the root directory.

2-112 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• NLSFUNC is required only when your applications require the extended

country information DOS can provide, or when you use CHCP to change
code pages.
• The command loads the NLSFUNC program.
o DOS increases in size (about 2.8 Kbytes).
o NLSFUNC supports the DOS function call (66 in hex) that
provides information for the current country code (set up by the
COUNTRY code in your system or the COUNTRY directive in
CONFIG.SYS).
o You can use CHCP after loading NLSFUNC.
• NLSFUNC remains active until you restart DOS.
• It helps to designate appropriate drives and paths.
• If the extended country information file (usually COUNTRY'.SYS) is not
specified, NLSFUNC does not change the path DOS uses to find the
file. The COUNTRY directive in CONFIG.SYS is the only other way
to change the path. If neither NLSFUNC or CONFIG.SYS have set the
path, DOS expects to use the COUNTRY.SYS file in the root directory.
• You can help avoid errors by placing COUNTRY.SYS in the root directory
of the startup disk (probably drive C).

MS-DOS Commands 2-113

PAMCODE
External HP extension to DOS
Starts the Personal Application Manager command processor (PAM).

Syntax
PAMCODE ROOT [/P]
L- Permanently loads the PAM command processor
Examples

Command Result / Action

pamcode root /p Installs a copy of the command processor
named PAMCODE.COM. The jP options tells
DOS to load the the copy of PAMCODE.COM
permanently.

2-114 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You can run PAMCODE from COMMAND.COM (the DOS command

processor) or from PAM.
• Including /P to load the PAM command processor permanently means
the EXIT command will not return to the previous command processor.
• When you do not include /P, running the EXIT command returns you
to the previous command processor (typically COMMAND. CO M).
• People most often run PAMCODE from the DOS command processor.

MS-DOS Commands 2-115

PATH
Internal, Version 2 to present
Sets the searching order for directories containing commands and batch files by
telling DOS to search a specified list of drives and paths when a command or
batch file is not found in the current directory.

Syntax
PATH [dl:]pathl;[d2:]path2; ., .
1
....- - _ List of drives and paths containing DOS commands and
executable files (do not include a filename or extension)

Examples

Command Result/ Action

patha:\;c:\;c:bin;c:\bin\util Causes DOS to look for commands or batch
files:
l. under the root directory on the disk
in drive A; and
2. on the disk in drive C as follows:
a. root directory.
b. bin unger the root directory.
c. utii under bin under the root
directory.

2-116 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Use PATH to make DOS search your hierarchial file system, saving you
the need to type drives and path names for commands and batch files.
• PATH applies only to commands, programs, and batch files having COM,
EXE, or BAT extensions.
• The order of the specified drives and paths determines the search through
directories for a command or batch file.
• Separate drive names and paths with colons and specifications with
semicolons (for example, c: \bin; a: \).
• Not specifying a disk drive name for a path causes PATH to use the
current disk drive.
• PATH might not always apply. Some applications expect files for data
and libraries to be in your working directory.
• Specify absolute paths, not relative paths. That is, start paths at the
root directory (for example, c: \bin\util \local instead of something
like util \local).
• You can use APPEND to specify search path(s) for data files.

MS-DOS Commands 2-117

PRINT
External, Version 2 to present
Does background printing to a printer, which frees the computer to perform other
tasks.

Syntax
/D:device
/B:bu/size
PRINT
/M:maxtick
/ Q:maxfiles Lfiles~c1 ~~]
J [ .,.

/S:timeslice
/U:busytick
In the syntax, you can specify additional files: filespec2 and so on. See the section
called "Tips and Hints" for information about the options.

Examples

Command Result / Action

print D:prn a:\rpts\memo.txt Selects PRN as the printing device. Prints
the file named memo.txt, which is under
the root directory oil the disk in drive A.
print letter. txt IP Ie primer. doc Places letter. txt ip the queue of files to
be printed and cancels the background
printing of primer. doc. (The order of
the secondary switches, /P and Ie, is
important) .

2-118 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints
Concerning the options (switches) in the syntax, the first set of switches lets you
determine how PRINT works. Specify what you want the first time you execute
PRINT. Except for ID:device, the switches manipulate how fast a printer works.
/D:device The device used for printing. If used, it must be first, and if you
do not use it, DOS prompts for a device. PRN works unless you
have a serial printer. Then, enter the device name of the printer,
typically COM1.
IB:buJsize The size of the memory buffer used during printing ranges from
1 to 32767 (for example, B:l024). The default is 512. Use
multiples of 512, such as 1024 and 2048. Using IB:4096 increases
performance for most documents of two pages or less.
/M:maxtick The maximum time in clock ticks that PRINT has for sending
characters to a printer. The value ranges from 1 to 255 (for
example, M:4). The default is 2, and it works well.
/ Q:maxfiles The maximum number of files you can queue for printing ranges
from 1 to 32 (for example, Q:20). The default is 10. Placing too
many files in the queue causes an error and causes DOS to ignore
the command.
/S:timeslice The number of slices in a second ranges from 1 to 255 (for
example, S:6). The default is 8. It works well.
/U:busytick The maximum time in clock ticks for PRINT to wait for a busy or
unavailable printer. The value ranges from 1 to 255 (for example,
U:4). Default is 1. Increase this time (about 2 to 8) as you use
slower printers (for example, a 4800 baud serial printer or 100cps
parallel printer).

MS-DOS Commands 2-119

More Tips and Hints for PRINT
Because you can use PRINT with many switches and file specifications, this
section contains numerous tips and hints. The examples showed typical
situations. If they do not provide enough information, study the following
information:
• The term "clock tick" is the smallest unit of time for personal computers,
approximately 0.0549 seconds.
• PRINT controls background printing (that is, printing a disk-based file
while the computer performs other tasks). The command queues files to
be printed (that is, it places them in line to be printed).
• PRINT works best with text files. Most characters, including control
characters, get printed. DOS pads CHR$(9) with spaces to the next
eight-column location.
• Using background printing for files having a . COM or .EXE extension
can produce strange results.
• Do not print something else when PRINT controls the printer.
• Background printing of files on a flexible disk can take time. Do not
remove a disk during printing.
• Do not edit or erase a file being printed.
• You can use a second set of switches when you use PRINT.
o The order of the switches is important. Each switch affects the
preceding file and succeeding files up to the next switch.
o Not specifying a switch assumes /P.

2-120 MS-DOS Commands

• The second set of switches follows:
IP Turns on print mode, adding the preceding file and subsequent
files to the print queue until finding a IC in the command or
until you type I Return I.
IT Terminates the background printing of all files, including the
file being printed. You need not specify any filenames because
the switch cancels printing of all files, including those on the
command line.
IC Cancels specific file( s) in the print queue. Stops a file being
printed and displays a message. Removes the preceding file and
all subsequent files from the print queue that were entered in a
command until a IP is found in the command or until you type
I Return I.
• PRINT is external. Therefore, you might need to provide a drive and
path ahead of PRINT to help DOS find the command.
• Not entering a file name displays the status of the background printing.
• Once you set the status of background printing, you cannot change it
until you restart DOS.
• Files print in the entered order. If you use wildcard characters, the files
print in their order in the directory.
• Entering PRINT / C has no effect.
• If DOS detects a disk error during printing, DOS cancels printing,
indicates there is an error, and continues by printing other files in the
queue.
• The first execution of PRINT increases the size of DOS by about 5.2
Kbytes. Altering the default settings for PRINT can change the size of
DOS. You must restart DOS to reclaim the lost space.

MS-DOS Commands 2-121

PROMPT
Internal, Version 2 to present
Lets you customize the DOS system prompt (for example, the A> or C>
prompts).

Syntax
PROMPT prompLstring
1
....._ _ _ The string (meta-string) for the prompt

Examples

Command Result/ Action

prompt Makes the standard system prompt reappear.
(Use this command to restore the system prompt.)
Sue $ Makes Sue the prompt and creates a space
between the prompt and anything you type.
prompt $p Makes the current disk drive and path the prompt
(for example, A:/ACME/JOBS/LTRS): See
meta-characters in "Tips and Hints" .
prompt $p $g Like the above example, but adds an => to imply
where you see typed commands.
prompt $d $$ Makes the date and $ the prompt (for example,
Mon 8-22-1988 $). See meta-characters in "Tips
and Hints".

2-122 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Meta-strings let you use special characters. Each meta-string starts with
$ and has one additional character (for example, $t). Within practical
limits, you can use several strings and meta-strings in a prompt.
$_ Does a CR LF sequence (moves the cursor to the next line).
$b Produces a vertical bar (that is, $b displays I).
$d Displays the date (for example, Wed 7-20-1988).
$e Produces an Escape character, ASCII IBh.
$g Displays the greater-than character (».
$h Does a backspace, which erases the previous character.
$1 Displays the less-than character «).
$n Shows the current disk drive in the prompt.
$p Shows the current disk drive and path through the current
directory (for example, C:\DOS\,BASIC).
$q Displays the equal character (==) .
$t Shows the time in the prompt (for example, 9:54:12.14).
$v Shows the version number of your DOS.
other Ignored (for example, $k does nothing).
• A new prompLstring becomes the system prompt until you restart DOS or
execute another PROMPT. You can use PROMPT in AUTOEXEC.BAT
files.
• To start a prompt with a DOS delimiter (blank, space, colon, and so on),
precede the character with a null meta-string (for example, $A).
• Use SET to see the prompt string after setting it.

MS-DOS Commands 2-123

RECOVER
External, Version 2 to present
Recovers a single file or all files from a disc containing bad sectors. Data in
bad sectors cannot be recovered. (Use RECOVER for one file with care; use
RECOVER for all files on a disk with extreme care. See "Examples" and "Tips
and Hints" before you use the command.)

Syntax
RECOVER filespec
L The drive, path, and file name.

Examples

Command Result / Action

recover junk. doc Recovers the file named junk. doc.
recover c : \report . txt Recovers the file named report. txt under the root
directory on drive C.
recover a: Removes all subdirectories and moves all files to
the root directory, giving them meaningless names
and appending trash to the. end of all files not
ending on a cluster boundary. on drive A. You
probably never want to do this on your hard disk.

2-124 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• RECOVER has serious limitations and can do things you may not like.
Study the command and tips/hints before you do anything.
• If a sector on a disk causes read/write errors, RECOVER can be used to
recover either the file containing the sector (minus the bad sector) or the
entire disk if the bad sector is in the root directory.
• RECOVER asks about beginning recovery. If you decide not to continue,
use I CTRL HBreak I to stop execution. Otherwise, press any key to begin.
DOS reads the file sector-by-sector, skipping over bad sectors, marking
them as defective so DOS will not use them, and placing good sectors in a
file having the specified name. After recovering good sectors, RECOVER
displays:
nnnnnn of mmmmmm bytes recovered

where nnnnnn is the number of recovered bytes and mmmmmm is the

size of the original file.
Tips and Hints continue on the next page.

MS-DOS Commands 2-125

 • When you recover all files on a disk in a drive, DOS searches the File
Allocation Table (FAT) for chains of allocation units (clusters). DOS
creates a file in the root directory of the specified drive for each chain
found, using this format:
FILEnnnn.REC

where nnnn is a sequential number, starting with 0001. After recovering

the files, RECOVER displays:
xxxx file(s) recovered

where xxxx is the number of recovered files. Noticing how the command
can possibly move files and remove subdirectories, you can imagine
potential problems. A DIR will display something like:
FILE0001 REC 5120 10-20-88 9:55a
FILE0002 REC 2048 10-20-88 9:55a

To finish a recovery, examine the contents of the files, editing as necessary,

and use RENAME to specify acceptable file names.

2-126 MS-DOS Commands

• If you have any doubt about where the command will do its work, provide
appropriate drive and path specifications. Without specifications, the
command works in the current drive and directory.
• When using a wildcard (* or ?), RECOVER acts only on the first file
matching the wildcards.
• You cannot often use recovered files that are programs. You can typically
use some of a recovered data or text file, but you may need to do some
editing.
• When recovering a directory, you need to examine each file (named
FILEnnnn.REC where nnnn is a four-place number). Rename the files
as you determine their contents.
• Do not use RECOVER on a drive affected by an ASSIGN, JOIN, or
SUBST command.
• RECOVER does not recover erased files.

MS-DOS Commands 2-127

REDIR
External HP extension, Version 3 to present, DOS Coprocessor Only
Installs HP-UX file system redirection into DOS. (Do this before using the
DOSMOUNT command.)

Syntax
REDIR [-F -/ -Q -0]
II L Send redirector error messages
Prohibit redirector from generating INT 24th errors
Install the redirector, but do not enable
L...-_ _ _ Force installation even with another installed redirector

Examples

Command Result/ Action

redir -f Forces installation of the redirector for DOS.

2-128 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You can use an upper- or lower-case letter for the switches.

• Running RED IR increases the size of DOS by 21890 bytes. The command
remains in memory until you restart DOS.
• The command is integrated with DOS through the INT 2F vector, and
relies on the semantics of DOS function calls.
• If you use the -Q switch, which prohibits the redirector from generating
INT 24h errors, the redirector will fail the operation and return an error
code to an application.
• You must run REDIR before using DOSMOUNT.

MS-DOS Commands 2-129

RENAME or REN
Internal, Version 1 to present
Changes the name of a file on a disk.

Syntax
RENAME old_filespec new_file

1_-
1'-- Name of new file
L..-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ Specification of old, original file

Examples

Command Result / Action

rename c : \notes . txt install. doc In the root directory on drive C, the
command renames notes. txt to install. doc
ren *. txt *. doc In the current drive and directory, renames
all files having a . txt extension to files
having a . doc extension. (There is a quirk in
that RENAME would stop if it encounters a
junk. txt and a junk. doc already exists.)

2-130 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You can easily make mistakes and rename the "wrong" file. It is better to
carefully specify a drive and path than to assume you are in an appropriate
drive and directory.
• You must specify an old (existing) file and a new (renamed) file.
• Since you rename an existing file, the new file has the same drive and path
so DOS will know which file is being renamed. Do not specify a drive or
path for the new file.

MS-DOS Commands 2-131

REPLACE
External, Version 3.2 to present
Selectively replaces files with matching names from one location to another, or
selectively adds files from one location to another.

Syntax
REPLACE source_filespec [d:path] [IAlPIRISIW]

,
II I Pause to insert disk
, Replace in subdirectories
Replace read-only files
'------- Prompt before adding file
~----- Add new files
' - - - - - - - - - - Destination directory
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Directory containing source
files

Examples

Command Result/ Action

replace a: \*. com c: \bin Copies all files having a . COM extension in the
root directory on drive A over those files having
existing, matching file names in the BIN directory
under the root directory on drive C. Any . COM
file not having a matching file in C:\BIN is not
copied.
replace a:*.exe c:\ /s Copies all files in the current directory of drive
on drive A having an .EXE extension over the
existing, matching files under the root directory
on drive C and all subdirectories of the root
directory.

2-132 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You must specify a filename. You can use wildcard characters.

• Not specifying a destination path replaces or adds files in the current
directory.
• Do not use the I A and IS switches together.
• REPLACE replaces or adds files according to file names; the command
does not care about the contents of files.
• Replace does not process hidden or system files.
• The following switches control how REPLACE works:
IA Adds files to the destination directory. That is, you can add files
from source that do not have a matching file name in the destination
directory.
IP Prompts for a decision about replacing or adding a file to the
destination. You can replace or add files selectively, answering Y
or N as desired.
IR Replaces read-only files also. Without this switch, REPLACE skips
read-only files.
IS Replaces files in the destination directory and its subdirectories.
IW Wait for insertion of the source disk. Helpful when you must
change disks before REPLACE searches for source files. Without
the switch, REPLACE assumes the correct disk is in the drive and
begins the search for source files.
Tips and Hints continue on the next page.

MS-DOS Commands 2-133

 • You generally use REPLACE to update DOS on a hard disk from a flexible
disk. For the DOS Coprocessor, use the HP-UX dosconfig command to
update a hard disk.
• Study what you want REPLACE to do before using it, especially in
using IS. Executing REPLACE with /S on an entire disk can provide
unexpected surprises because the command works on file names, not on
the content of files.
• To prevent being surprised, carefully restrict the drives and paths of the
source and destination files. It is better to replace files in small batches
than to unleash a global action.

2-134 MS-DOS Commands

Exit Codes
REPLACE returns DOS error codes (numbers). Zero means files were added or
replaced successfully. Otherwise, you can get the following codes:
2 No source files found
3 Invalid source or target path
5 File or directory access denied
8 Out of memory
11 Invalid parameters (switches) or incorrect number of parameters.
15 Invalid disk drive
22 Incorrect version of DOS

MS-DOS Commands 2-135

RESTORE
External, Version 2 to present
Restores one or more backup files from a disk (flexible or hard) to another disk.
(The complement of BACKUP.)

Syntax

,..-----------Drive containing backup files

r--------Drive, path and files being restored
.------Restores files into subdirectories
prompts before restoring some files

RESTORE d1: [filespec]

IG I
I
Restores files modified since last backup
rRestores files no longer in dest. directory
[IS /P /M /N /B:date / A:date /L:time /E:time]

Restores files modified before date J I

Restores files modified on or after date ~
Restores files modified at or later than time
Restores files modified at or earlier than time

Example

Command Result / Action

restore a: c: \util \*. * Restores all files (the *. *) in the util directory
under the root directory on drive C, getting the
files from the disk in drive A.

2-136 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Use the following switches to control a restore. Do not use switches lA,
IB, and IN in the same command.
IS Restores files in the specified directory and its subdirectories.
IP Prompts for decisions about restoring hidden or read-only
files and files that were changed since the last backup. This
switch works well when you use the 1M switch.
1M Restores files that were modified or deleted since the last
backup. A file is modified when its archive flag is on. Use
this switch after having a disaster such as when the current
copy of your modified files is bad, and you have erased files
from your hard disk.
IN Restores backed up files that no longer appear in the
specified directory on the destination disk. To restore erased
files use the 1M switch, and then use the IN switch.
Tips and Hints continue on the next page.

MS-DOS Commands 2-137

 IB:date Restores files created or modified before the date. Use the
date according to its specification in CONFIG.SYS. This can
be any of the following areas:
North American mm-dd-yy
European dd-mm-yy
East Asian yy-mm-dd
mm the month (1 through 12)
dd the day (1 through 31)
yy the year (80 through 99)
The character separating the parts of the date can vary:
hyphen, period, or slash. In North America, you can use a
slash instead of the hyphen.
IA:date Restores files created or modified on or after the date.
IL:time Restores files created or modified at or later than the time.
Use the form hh:mm:ss for hours, minutes, and seconds.
(for example, 02:30:15). The separator is usually a colon,
but you can use a period if the COUNTRY command in
CONFIG.SYS was set to Denmark, Finland, or Germany.
Do not use this switch without also using I A:date.
IE:time Restores files created or modified earlier the time, using the
same format as IL:time. Do not use this switch without also
using IB:date.
• Only files saved with BACKUP can be restored.
• You must specify the drive containing the backed up files. If you put the
restored files on the current disk, you need not specify a destination drive.
You need to specify the path according to where you want to place the
restored files. Not specifying a path puts the restored files~in the current
directory.
• Not specifying a file name is the same as specifying *. * (that is, all files
are restored).
• If you use a path name, you must also specify a file name.

2-138 MS-DOS Commands

 • RESTORE prompts you toinsert a series of backup disks in order. Not
inserting disks in the right order pauses the operation and you are asked
to insert the correct disk.
• Restoring files backed up when an ASSIGN, SUBST, or JOIN command
was in effect can produce unacceptable results. Clear these commands
first.
• Use the IS switch with caution. Version 3.3 of RESTORE does
notJestore DOS system files (fBMBfO.COM, fBMDOS.COM, and
COMMAND. COM). In general, the 3.3 version of RESTORE is different
from previous versions, so think about what you want to accomplish before
specifying a command.
• Do not use the 1M switch while an APPEND with IX is in effect.
APPEND makes RESTORE find files in paths specified to APPEND.
Disable the APPEND. Then, do a RESTORE.

Exit Codes
The RESTORE command displays exit codes. Zero indicates a normal
completion of a restore. Otherwise, you can get the following codes:
1 No files were found to restore
2 Some files were not restored due to conflicts in sharing
3 The restore was terminated by the operator via a I CTRL HBreak I or an I Esc I
4 The restore was terminated by an error

MS-DOS Commands 2-139

RMDIR or RD
Internal, Version 2 to present
Removes the last subdirectory specified in a path.

Syntax
RMDIR [d:]path
L-=. The path to the subdirectory to be removed
The drive containing the subdirectory

Examples

Command Result / Action

rmdir c: \util \tools\axe On drive C, the command removes the axe
subdirectory, which is under tools under util under
the root directory.
rd bin\local\myprogs Starting in the current directory, the command
starts relatively down in bin to local and then
removes the directory named myprogs.
rmdir temp Removes a subdirectory named temp in the
current directory.

2-140 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The subdirectory must be empty except the current directory file (.) and
any parent directory files ( .. ).
• You cannot remove the current directory. The removed directory must be
a relative subdirectory or a different directory given by an absolute path.
• You cannot remove the root directory.
• Not specifying a drive uses the current drive.

MS-DOS Commands 2-141

SELECT
External, Version 3 to present
Creates a disk with DOS files and prepares CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT
files configured for your country. (This is seldom needed (or easy to do) in the
DOS Coprocessor environment.)

Syntax
SELECT [ [ds:] dd:[pathd] ] countrycode keycode

I L The keyboard code (e.g. US)

~ The country code (e.g. 001)
I~------------------
The drive and path receiving
DOS files
' - - - - - - - - - - - - - The drive holding the DOS files

Examples

Command Result/ Action

select a: c: \ 049 GR Gets the DOS files from the disk in drive A and
places them in the root directory on drive C with
the country code and keyboard code for Germany.
Formats drive C before placing files on it.

Tips and Hints

• Specify countrycode and keycode according to the items in the table on

the facing page:

2-142 MS-DOS Commands

 Country Country Code Key Code

Austria 061 US
Belgium 032 BE
English Canada 001 CE
French Canada 002 CF
Denmark 045 DK
Finland 358 SU
France 033 FR
Germany 049 GR
Italy 039 IT
Latin America 003 LS
Netherlands 031 DT
Norway 047 NO
Spain 034 SP

• SELECT uses FORMAT to format the target disk (the disk that gets
the files). Consequently, using SELECT on a disk having information
destroys the information.
• Drive A is the default source drive, drive B is the default destination.
• The source drive must be drive A or drive B.
• Any drive except the source drive can be the destination drive.
• If the destination path does not specify a directory, SELECT copies files
into the root directory.

MS-DOS Commands 2-143

SET
Internal, Version 2 to present
Adds, changes, displays, and deletes strings from the DOS environment.

Syntax
SET[ name= [string]]
I L-The string to be assigned to name (e.g., $p)
" ' - - - - - - The name of the string in the environment

Examples

Command Result / Action

set With no parameters, SET displays the
current environment; typically:
COMSPEC=C:\COMMAND.COM
PROMPT=$p$g
PATH=C:\UTIL;C:\BIN

set coms.pec=C: \apps \command . com Sets the string called COMSPEC to
"C:\apps\command.com" .

2-144 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Using SET by itself displays the current environment.

• Use SET name=string to set or change the string associated with a name.
• Use SET name= without the string to delete a name.
• Lower-case letters in name are changed to upper-case, and letters in string
are taken literally.
• Using SET in an AUTOEXEC.BAT file for DOS can set the prompt and
path. This way, you do not need to use the PROMPT or PATH commands
to set those things.
• SET will set anything, including the meaningless name shown in the
following example:
set junk=c:\trash

The idea is to note requirements for applications and use SET in AU-
TOEXEC.BAT files to make the application work effectively. For exam-
ple, some programs use environment variables (see their documentation).
SET can set the values of these variables in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file for
an application.
• An environment string should not exceed 121 characters. DOS enforces
this by limiting the command line to 127 characters.
• DOS cannot expand the environment when you load resident programs
such as MODE, GRAPHICS, KEYB, or PRINT. The default, initial size
of the environment is 160 characters. The initial size can be increased
to a maximum of 32768 characters by using the SHELL directive in
CONFIG.SYS.

MS-DOS Commands 2-145

SIZE
External HP extension, DOS Coprocessor only
Displays the sizes of selected files in a subdirectory, and displays the amount of
space needed to copy files to a disk.

Syntax
SIZE [filespec] [d:]
Will show space needed for a copy to the drive
Specifies directory for showing. sizes of files

Examples

Command Result/ Action

size d: \reports\old\*. txt Displays sizes in bytes of files in \ reports\ old
having the txt extension.
size c:\ a: Displays the amount of space in bytes required on
drive A to hold all the files in the root directory
on drive C.

2-146 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• When you deternline the sizes of files, the following exanlple shows a
typical listing:
size (c) Ace Software 1987
report1.txt 3425
myreport.txt 458

11 files, total of 125550 bytes

• When you determine the amount of disk space needed on drive A to

contain the files in a specified directory, the following example shows a
typical listing:
size (c) Ace Software 1987
report1.txt 3425 -> 3072
myreport.txt 458 -> 1024

11 files, total of 125550 bytes, (13096) bytes disk space required on A:

Note that requirenwnts appear in blocks of disk space.

• RUlllling SIZE without parameters lists the sizes of all files in the current
drive and directory.
• Running SIZE and specifying only a drive or directory reports the number
of files and file sizes as o. YOll must include a file name in the specification
unless you are listing the files in the current directory.
• If you use SIZE to determine the required disk space for a copy, running
DIR can tell yon if the required amount of space is free on the destination
disk.

MS-DOS Commands 2-147

SORT
External, Version 2 to present
Reads lines from the standard input device (typically the keyboard), does an
ASCII sort of the lines, and writes the sorted lines to the standard output device
(typically, the monitor).

Syntax
SORT [/R /+c]
L---=. Starts sorting at column number c
Sorts in reverse order (Z to A)

Examples

Command Result / Action

sort <zip_code. txt Redirects input, getting the lines from the
file named zip_code. txt. Displays output on
the standard device, probably the display or
a window on the monitor screen.
sort <a: \names . txt /R I PRN Gets input through redirection from
names. txt in the root directory on the disk
in drive A. Sorts in reverse order and sends
output via a pipe to the printer.
dir I sort /+20 SORT accepts input from--the-pipe from
DIR and sorts the listing, starting with
column 20. The remaining, sorted list goes
to standard output.
.. -

2-148 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• In general, use redirection and! or pipes. Without them, SORT typically

takes input from the keyboard, which is not generally what you want to
do. Without a pipe, SORT typically sends output to a display, which may
or may not be what you want to do.
• If you redirect the input and output, use different respective file names.
• SORT uses an ASCII sequence as follows:
o Lower-case letters are treated as upper-case letters.
o Control characters, including Tab, are not expanded.
o Characters in the 128 to 255 ASCII range can get collated
according to rules set by the COUNTRY command.
• SORT can handle a file up to 63 Kbytes (64512 bytes).
• SORT works on text files, discarding information after and including the
end-of-file character (EOF).
• SORT treats numbers as characters, 0 before 1, 1 before 2, and so on.
Therefore, 142 or 1268 appear before 2 or 21, and so on.
• SORT does not expand control characters; consequently, a Control-I (Tab)
may not be output as you expect.
• You can get unpredictable results when you sort files containing data
from programs, compressed data, control characters, or unusual EOF
characters.

MS-DOS Commands 2-149

SUBST
External, Version 3.1 to present
Substitutes a new drive, called a virtual drive, for an existing drive and path.

Syntax
The syntax varies according to your purpose.

Establishing an Alias
SUBST dl: d2:pathname

I ' - Existing drive and path

~ New, virtual disk drive

Deleting an Alias
SUBST dl: /D
I 1- Forces the deleting
~- Existing virtual disk drive to be deleted

Seeing Current Aliases

SUBST

2-150 MS-DOS Commands

Examples

Command Result/ Action

subst e: c:\bin Substitutes drive E for the subdirectory named
bin under the root directory on drive C.
subst e: ID Deletes the virtual drive E. The ID switch causes
the disconnect.
subst Shows the current virtual drives, something like:
E: => C:\BIN
F: => C:\USERS\DOCS

Tips and Hints

• While a substitute drive is in effect, use caution in running DOS

commands that work on directories or files. It is easy to affect the real
entity instead of affecting the substituted entity.
• Do not use ASSIGN, JOIN, APPEND, CHKDSK, PATH, LABEL,
BACKUP, DISKCOPY, DISKCOMP, FDISK, MKDIR, and RMDIR on
a substituted drive.
• The virtual drive letter must be less than or equal to the LASTDRIVE
letter defined in CONFIG.SYS, or it must be less than or equal to F: if
LASTDRIVE is not set.
• dl: and d2: cannot be the sanIe. dl: can be the same as the current
drive.
• While a drive and path are substituted, you can still reference them by
specifying the old drive and path.
• If you specify an existing physical drive as the virtual drive, dl:, that
physical drive is inaccessible while the substitution is in effect.

MS-DOS Commands 2-151

SYS
External, Version 1 to present
Places a copy of hidden DOS system files on a specified disk.

Syntax
SYS [d:]
L The name of the drive receiving the copy of DOS system files
Examples

Command Result / Action

sys a: Copies DOS system files onto the disk in drive A.

2-152 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• You can use SYS to put DOS on application work disks. If you also copy
COMMAND. COM onto the work disk, you can boot your system from
the application disk.
• You must specify the drive name that gets a copy of DOS, and the current
drive must contain files named IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM.
Otherwise, SYS prompts you to insert a disk in the current drive having
these files.
• To make a system disk a bootable disk, you must also copy COM-
MAND. COM onto the disk.
• A disk getting a copy of DOS must be completely empty, or must have
been formatted with one of the following:
o The /S option (versions 1, 2, or 3).
o The /B option (versions 2 or 3).
Alternatively, the disk could be formatted with a utility program that
reserves space for the operating system. Otherwise, you get a message
saying there is no room for the system.
• A system disk cannot start up DOS unless IBMBIO. COM and IBM-
DOS. COM are the first two files in the root directory (even though DIR
does not list these files). In addition, IBMBIO. COM must reside in con-
secutive sectors. Not meeting these conditions causes an error.

MS-DOS Commands 2-153

TIME
External in version 1, Internal since
Sets or shows the system time.

Syntax
TIME [hh:mm:ss.xx]
II L Hundredths of a secoud (0 to 99)
Seconds (0 to 59)
Minutes (0 to 59)
~--- Hour (0 to 23)

Examples

Command Result / Action

time Shows something like:
Current time is 13: 23: 54.23
Enter new time
You can enter a time, which resets the time, or
just type I Return I to continue.
time 08: 14:32 Sets the hour to 8 a.m., the minutes to 14, the
seconds to 32, and disregards the hundredths,
which default to O.

2-154 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The delimiters (colon and period) can vary, depending bn the setting of
the country code in CONFIG.SYS.
• You must enter the correct delimiters between numbers. The United
States and similar countries use only the period to separate seconds from
hundredths. Some countries use a comma.
• You do not need to provide all values. For example, 10:23 changes the
hours and minutes and leaves the seconds alone.
• Not entering a valid time or delimiter causes an error.
• In the DOS Coprocessor and SOFTPC, time is set from the HP-UX time
when you start up DOS. Changing DOS time does not change HP-UX
time or the time on the battery-backed clock on your computer.
• The main reason for setting the time is to maintain information about
when you create or change files and directories.
• When you start DOS without PAM or an AUTOEXEC.BAT file, DOS
always prompts you to enter the time and date. If you have an
AUTOEXEC.BAT file, DOS does not prompt for the time and date unless
the file contains TIME and DATE commands.

MS-DOS Commands 2-155

TREE
External, Version 2 to present
Displays the directory structure on a disk and optionally displays the files in each
directory.

Syntax
TREE [d: IF]
I L Makes TREE also display the files
L The disk drive having the directories you want to see

Examples

Command Result/ Action

tree Displays a tree showing the directory structure of
the current drive.
tree c: IF >PRN Creates a tree of the directories on the disk in
drive C, along with all the files in the directories,
and outputs the results to the printer.

2-156 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The output from TREE can become cluttered. It is often better to redir.ect
the output to a printer, and then study the tree in detail.
• TREE does not provide information about dates, times, and sizes.
• Getting a printed copy of the output from TREE is useful when you
backup your system. Store the printout with the backup disks so you can
see what the file system looked like.

MS-DOS Commands 2-157

TYPE
Internal, Version 1 to present
Displays the contents of a file on a display or in a window.

Syntax
TYPE filespec

L The drive, path, and file to be displayed (The drive and path
are optional)

Examples

Command Result / Action

type c:\util\tools\strip.scr Displays the lines in the script named strip.ser,
which is in a directory named tools in a directory
named util in the root directory on drive C.
type junk I more Reads the lines in a file named junk, and the
pipeline sends the output to MORE, which pauses
the display each time the screen or window fills
up.

2-158 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• Not specifying a drive or path uses the current drive and directory.
• The specified file must match a file in the specified or current directory.
• You cannot use wildcard characters in the file specification.
• The command sends all characters in a file to the display, including
control characters. The command expands a Tab character, Control-I,
and CHR$(9) to the next 8-character column.
• TYPE does not work on a directory, only on a file.
• TYPE works well in pipelines and with redirection.
• If you want to pause the display when the number of lines in a file exceeds
23, pipe the output to MORE.

MS-DOS Commands 2-159

UX2DOS
An external HP extension to DOS
Converts ASCII files from the HP-UX format to the DOS format. (Besides
working in DOS, the command works in HP-UX.)

Syntax
UX2DOS filespec
L The file being converted

Examples

Command Result/ Action

ux2dos auto exec . ux >autoexec. bat Converts an HP-UX file named
autoexec.ux to the DOS format and
redirects the converted output to a
file named autoexec.bat.
type config I ux2dos >c: . config. sys The TYPE command in the pipeline
sends the file named config to
UX2DOS for conversion, and the
converted output from the UX2DOS
command is redirected to a file
named config.sys in the current
directory on drive C.

2-160 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• DOS cannot read HP-UX ASCII files directly. To use an HP-UX file in
DOS, you need to first use UX2DOS to convert the file. For example, to
use a word processor running on DOS to edit an HP-UX file, convert the
file and then edit it.
• In most cases, UX2DOS works best with redirection and pipelines.
• Not spe.cifying a file makes UX2DOS accept input from the standard input
device, probably the key board.
• Unless redir~cted or piped, the converted output goes to the standard
output device, probably the display.
• The original file that provides input is not changed.
• To get a more complete picture of converting DOS and HP-UX files, see
the UX2DOS command.

MS-DOS Commands 2-161

VER
Internal, Version 2 to present

Syntax
VER

Examples

Command Result/ Action

ver Could display something like the following example:
HP Vectra Personal Computer MS-DOS Version 3.30 - C.01.01

2-162 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The command shows a one-digit version number and a two-digit revision

number.

MS-DOSCommands 2-163
VERIFY
Internal, Version 2 to present
Turns the disk write verify switch off and on.

Syntax
VERIFY [ON I OFF]
I 1- Turns the verify status off
~ Sets the verify status
Examples

Command Result/ Action

verify With no options, you might see the following:
VERIFY is off
Otherwise, you will see it is ON.
verify on Thrns the verify status ON.

2-164 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• VERIFY accepts only one of two options: ON or OFF. Without an

option, you see the current status.
• The verify status remains on until you take one of the following actions:
o Restart DOS.
o Execute VERIFY OFF.
o Do something that causes a SET VERIFY system call.
• VERIFY checks data written to a disk to ensure correct recording. When
VERIFY is OFF, DOS does not check data. VERIFY does not affect any
other DOS operations.
• Using VERIFY has a tradeoff:
o Having the verify status ON ensures the integrity of data, but it
takes longer to write a file to a disk.
o Having the verify status OFF causes files to write faster, but you
might have corrupted data. In most cases, you need not verify
writing unless you must be sure the data is correct (for example,
a company inventory) or you want to ensure a backup is correct.
• Having the verify status ON can slow up writing by up to 100%. The
amount varies somewhat with the versions of DOS. Hard disks can take
even more time.

MS-DOS Commands 2-165

VOL
Internal, Version 2 to present
Displays the volume label of a disk when the label exists.

Syntax
VOL [d:]
LThe name of the disk drive
Examples

Command Result / Action

vol c: Displays the volume label of the disk in drive C. You might see
something like this:
Volume in drive C is PROGRAMS

2-166 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• The command shows the volume label for the current drive if you do not
specify a drive .
• You can create a volume label when using the FORMAT or LABEL
commands.

MS-DOS Commands 2-167

XDIR
External HP extension, Version 3.3, DOS Coprocessor only
Provides an HP -UX type listing of files.

Syntax
[In IP IV]
II
XDIR [filespec]
L Displays version number
Pauses listing
Lists only subdirectories, no .files
L.....-_ _ _ _ _ _ The drive, path, (and file) to list

Examples

Command Result/ Action

xdir d: \usr\lib\dos Lists the files and subdirectories in the dos
directory under d:\ usr\ lib.

2-168 MS-DOS Commands

Tips and Hints

• XDIR is helpful for listing files on drive D, the drive having the HP- UX
files.
• In particular, XDIR shows DOS file names, sizes in bytes, dates and times
last modified, HP-UX file permissions, user/group ownerships, and HP-
UX file names. For example, you might see the following:
<OIR> 7/02/88 2:38p [rwrwrw] <115,016> ..
BIN <OIR> 10/02/88 2:38p [rwrwrw] <115,016> bin
1876 8/11/88 4:06p [rwr-r-] <115,016> load_dos

• Not specifying a drive or path uses the current drive and path.
• Specifying a file lists information only for that file. You can use wildcards
to list a group of files. XDIR makes the following assumptions about
specifications:
XDIR filename means XOIR filename.*
XOIR .ext means XOIR *.ext

• You can edit the COUNTRY directive in CONFIG.SYS to alter the

format of the date and time.
• Files that do not meet naming conventions for DOS may not be accessible
to DOS.
• At the end of a listing, XDIR displays the number of listed files and the
amount of space remaining on the HP-UX file system. For example, you
might see the following message:
12 File(s) 5564416 bytes free

MS-DOS Commands 2-169

 3
Batch File Command Reference
Batch command processing allows multiple MS-DOS commands and application
programs to be placed in a file, or batch, and executed as a single command. The
batch processor in MS-DOS executes the commands in the batch file, saving you
from entering them yourself. Batch files contain the file name extension .BAT.
Batch processing has its own set of special commands which provide a rudimen-
tary "program language", further enhancing the capabilities of MS-DOS batch
processing.
There is one limitation to using batch processing which you should be aware
of. The response to any command prompt must still be typed at the keyboard,
and cannot be included in the batch file. This prevents using batch files for
unattended system operation with MS-DOS commands which issue prompts.
Even so, batch command files which include these commands are still useful
for eliminating keyboard entry of command lines.

Batch File Command Reference 3-1

Batch Files
This section discusses batch files. A later section named "Batch File Commands"
descri bes the commands you can use in a batch file.

Creating a Batch File

Use EDLIN, COpy or an ASCII word processor. The file must be unformatted,
with each line containing one command line. When saving the file, name it with
the .BAT extension, which indicates to MS-DOS that this is a batch file.

Executing a Batch File

Type the name of the file without the .BAT extension as shown in the following
example:
runprog I Return I

The example executes a batch file named runprog.bat in the current directory of
the active drive.

Preventing Command Line Echoing

Putting an @ character in front of a batch command prevents only that command
from echoing to the display. This feature is commonly used with ECHO OFF,
for example:
(QECHO OFF

3-2 Batch File Command Reference

Using Positional Parameters 0/00 - 0/09
You can insert ten positional parameters, %0 - %9, into batch command files to
specify a replaceable parameter. The actual values for the replaceable parameters
are entered on the command line when the batch command file is executed. The
first value in the command line replaces %1, the second %2, and so on. %0 is
always replaced by the file specification of the batch command file, without the
.BAT extension. The %0 parameter is used in the following example for a batch
file named replace. bat:
type 1.O.bat
dir 1.1
chkdsk 1.2
copy 1.1*.* 1.2

To execute this batch file, you must include two parameters in the command line
to provide values for %1 and %2. The command line:
C>replace a: b:

substitutes a: for %1 and b: for %2. The command lines which will actually he
executed are:
type replace. bat
dir a:
chkdsk b:
copy a:.*. * b:

The batch command file itself isn't modified.

Batch File Command Reference 3-3

If the % character is contained in a name in the batch command file, it must be
entered as a double % (%%) to differentiate it from the replaceable parameter
character. To specify the file HAL%.EXE in the batch command file, enter
HAL%%.EXE.

If the command line contains fewer replacement values than the number of
replaceable parameters in the batch file, the unspecified parameters will be
deleted. For example, if the example above had been invoked with only one
replacement value:
C>replace a:

the batch command file would execute the following MS-DOS command lines:
type replace.bat
dir a:
chkdsk
copy a:*.*

The number of variables can be effectively increased from 10 with the use of the
batch command SHIFT. This command is discussed later in this chapter.

Using the SET Command

Another method of replacing parameters is to use the MS-DOS SET command.
The SET command places name and parameter pairs in the system environment.
To use a name in a batch file, enclose the name in percent signs (%). When
the batch file is executed, the batch command processor ·will search the system
environment for any names it encounters. The corresponding parameter will be
substituted.
For example, the following command assigns the value example. txt to FILE:
A>set FILE=example.txt

To use this name in a batch file, enclose it in percent signs, as in this one-line
batch file:
type %FILE%

When this batch· command file is executed, the file example. txt will be typed.
The MS-DOS environment is lost when the system is rebooted. Therefore, the

3-4 Batch File Command Reference

SET command must be used to assign any names contained in batch command
files prior to execution.

Batch File Command Reference 3-5

Batch File Commands
This section describes the commands you can use in a batch file.

ECHO

Purpose
The ECHO command turns the screen display on or off during batch commands,
or displays a message.

Syntax

ECHO [ONIOFFI<message>]

Operation
ECHO ON displays all command lines as they are executed. This is the default
state.
ECHO OFF suppresses the display of command lines as they are executed.
However, the output from the commands and application programs themselves
will be displayed.
ECHO followed by a message displays the message regardless of the current
ECHO state (ON or OFF). This form of the command functions identically to
the REM command, with the exception that the message is displayed even in the
ECHO OFF state.
If the ECHO command is entered with no additional parameters, the current
state (ECHO ON or ECHO OFF) is displayed.

3-6 Batch File Command Reference

The following batch command file demonstrates all four forms of ECHO.
ECHO OFF
ECHO This is a message displayed by ECHO
DIR A:/W
ECHO ON
ECHO
DIR A:!W

When executed, this file produces the following display:

C>ECHO OFF
This is a message displayed by ECHO

Volume on drive B has no label

Directory of B:\

FILEt. TXT FILE2.TXT

2 file(s) 265234 bytes free

A>ECHO
ECHO is on
A>DIR A:/W

Volume on drive A has no label

Directory of A:\

FILEt. TXT FILE2.TXT

2 file(s) 265234 bytes free

A>

Notes

1. To prevent the ECHO OFF command from echoing, put an @ character

in front of it, for example:
<OECHO OFF

Batch File Command Reference 3-7

FOR

Purpose
The FOR command allows iterative execution of MS-DOS commands.

Syntax

FOR variable IN (set) DO command

Operation
The FOR command accepts three argurnents: variable, set, and command:
variable A positional variable consisting of any singie character. (It is
best to avoid the digits 0 - 9 and hence any conflict with the
positional arguments.) The variable is made equai to each value
in set.
set A series of values (such as file names) separated by spaces, or a
file name with one or more wildcard characters. Below are two
examples of valid sets.
(CHPT1.TXT CHPT2.TXT INDEX. TXT)
(*. TXT)'•
command The command line executed at each iteration of the loop.
Each time the variable is made equal to a value in the set, the command line after
DO is executed. In most cases the variable will be included in the command line.

3-8 Batch File Command Reference

The following command line in a batch file will find all of the chapter files for a
book, and run them sequentially through an index program:
for %%A in (chpt?txt) do index %%A

%%A is set to the file name of each chapter (chptl. txt, chpt2. txt, etc.) and the
command lines:
index chptl.txt
index chpt2.txt

are executed.

Notes

1. The FOR command may not be nested. Only one FOR command can be
included in each command line.
2. Path names are allowed in the set of variables.
3. The FOR command may be run from the MS-DOS command prompt.
The only difference is that the variable need only be preceded by one
"%".

Batch File Command Reference 3-9

· GOTO

Purpose
The GOTO command transfers control to the line following a label.

Syntax

GOTO <label>

Operation
The label can be any string of characters. However, only the first eight characters
are used by DOS. A label must be preceded by a colon (:) and there can be no
other commands in the line. The GOTO command will execute the command on
the line following the label. The following example will transfer control to the
REM command following the label :TWO.
goto two

:two
rem label two

Notes

1. The GOTO con1mand can be used with the IF command. This provides
IF -THEN branching in batch command files.
2. Labels within a batch file are not displayed when the batch file is executed.
Anything on the same line as the label is ignored. Thus, a label which is
not referenced may be used as a comment line and will not be displayed
when the batch file is executed.

3-10 Batch File Command Reference

IF

Purpose
Allows conditional execution of MS-DOS commands in batch files.

Syntax

IF [NOT] <condition> <command>

Operation
The IF command examines the condition, and executes the command if the
condition is true. If NOT precedes the condition, the command line is executed
when the condition is false. IF can test for the following conditions:
ERRORLEVEL number This condition is true if the previous pro-
gram executed had an exit code of number
or higher. An exit code is set by a specific
program. It is returned to the operating
system when the program has finished.
stringl >==string2 This condition is true if the two strings are
identical. Either or both strings may be
replaceable parameters. For example:
IF %l==EXAMPLE
IF %1==%2
EXIST [d:] [filespec] This condition is true if the file specified
exists. The file name may include the
wildcard characters.

Note
BACKUP, FORMAT, GRAFTABL, REPLACE, and RESTORE can return
an ERRORLEVEL. This facility is provided for programs that may return an
ERRORLEVEL that can be tested by this command.

Batch File Command Reference 3-11

PAUSE

Purpose
The PAUSE command suspends execution of a batch file and allows you to display
a message or an instruction to be performed before resuming.

Syntax

PAUSE [<message>]

Operation
The PAUSE command will temporarily suspend execution of a batch command
file. An optional message of up to 121 characters may be displayed. This will be
followed by the prompt:
Strike a key when ready ...

Pressing any key except I CTRL HBreak I or I CTRL HfJ will resume execution of the
batch file. (Pressing either of these key sequences will terminate the batch file.)
The PAUSE command is useful for issuing instructions to the user, and allowing
sufficient time to execute those instructions. For example, the PAUSE command:
pause Insert disc in drive A:

will display the message and prompt:

pause Insert disc in drive A:
Strike a key when ready ...

Notes
1. If ECHO is OFF, the optional message will not be displayed. However,
the Strike a key when ready prompt will be displayed.

3-12 Batch File Command Reference

REM

Purpose
The REM command displays a message on the screen.

Syntax

REM [< message>]

Operation
The message can be any string up to 123 characters in length. If the ECHO is
OFF, the message is not displayed.
The following command line:
rem Copy successfully completed.

will display:
Copy successfully completed.

Batch File Command Reference 3-13

SHIFT

Purpose
The SHIFT command allows access to more than 10 replaceable parameters.

Syntax

SHIFT

Operation
Each time the SHIFT command is executed, the values assigned to the replaceable
parameters are shifted; %1 becomes %0, %2 becomes %1, and so on. The tenth
value entered in the command line is assigned to %.9.
With SHIFT, the limit of 10 replaceable parameters can effectively be removed.
However, only 10 parameters can be active at anyone time, and there is no
way to retrieve parameters which have been "shifted out" (i.e. once a SHIFT is
executed, the parameter %0 that existed before the shift cannot be recovered).
For example,-suppose a batch file named test.bat contains four replaceable
parameters %0 thru %3. The batch file is executed with five replacement values:
test valuel value2 value3 value4 value5

3-14 Batch File Command Reference

Thus, the replaceable parameters %0 thru %3 are initially assigned the following
values:

%0 Value %1 Value %2 Value %3 Value

test value1 value2 value3

After the SHIFT command is executed, the values will be as follows:

%0 Value %1 Value %2 Value %3 Value

value1 value2 value3 value4

The original value of %0 is lost, all values are shifted down one position, and the
fourth replacement value given on the command line is used for %3. Another
shift would use the final value on the command line, and produce the following
values:

%0 Value %1 Value %2 Value %3 Value

value2 value3 value4 value5

Batch File Command Reference 3-15

 4
EDLIN Command Reference
EDLIN, the MS-DOS line editor, can be used to create, change, and display
source files and text files. Source files are defined as files containing program
listings; text files are defined as files containing data in legible format, such as
an unformatted word processing file. Text files will be used as examples in this
chapter.
The files you create or edit using EDLIN are divided into lines, and each line may
be up to 253 characters in length. Line numbers are generated and displayed
during the editing process, but are not present in the saved file.
Lines are always numbered consecutively in EDLIN files, regardless of the editing
functions performed. For example, when you insert lines, all line numbers
following inserted text are incremented by the number of lines inserted; and
when you delete lines in a file, the line numbers following the deleted text are
decremented by the number of lines deleted.
To start EDLIN, enter:
EDLIN [path] <file name> [/B]

where:
path Specifies the path to the file name you wish to create or
edit. If omitted, the current directory and active drive are
assumed.
file name Specifies the file you wish to create or edit.
/B Instructs EDLIN to ignore any embedded end-of-file marks
(I CTRL H~) in your file and process the entire file. This is
useful for editing files which are known to contain embedded
end-of-file marks.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-1

When you enter EDLIN, you will see the following display:
New file
*
If EDLIN does not find the specified file on the active drive or the specified drive,
a new file will be created using the file name you enter. EDLIN responds with
the words New file to indicate that a new file is being created.
If you specify an existing file, EDLIN will attempt to load it into memory. EDLIN
loads lines until memory is 75% full to allow room to add lines during editing,
and displays the * prompt. If your file is too large to load, you will have to
save some of the edited lines on the disc before you can load the remaining lines
for editing. The WRITE and APPEND commands describe how to do this. To
begin entering text, enter an I (Insert) command.
When you edit an existing file, EDLIN saves the old version of the file under the
same file name but with the extension .BAK. In this way, EDLIN automatically
keeps a backup copy of each file you create. The .BAK file cannot be edited. If
you wish to edit it, you must first rename it with a different extension, then start
EDLIN.
When you have completed your editing session, you leave EDLIN and save your
file on the disc using the END command.

Caution When you create or edit an EDLIN file, be certain there is enough
space on the specified disc to save the file; if there is not enough
space, you risk losing part of your data wh~n you attempt to save
it on the disc.

4-2 EDLIN Command Reference

Information Common To All EDLIN Commands

• Pathnames are aeceptable as options to commands. For example, typing:

edlin bin\user\joe\text.txt

allows you to edit the file text. txt in the bin\ user\ioe subdirectory.
• With the exception of the Edit command, all commands consist of a single
letter.
• With the exception of the End and Quit commands, commands may be
preceded and/or followed by parameters.
• Commands and string parameters may be entered in either uppercase or
lowercase letters, or a combination of both.
• Commands and parameters may be separated by delimiters for readabil-
ity; however, a delimiter is only required between two adjacent line num-
bers. Delimiters are spaces or commas.
For example, to delete line 6, the command 6D is the same as the command
6 D.

• You can refer to line numbers relative to the current line in your EDLIN
file. Use a minus sign (-) followed by a number to indicate a line preceding
the cu~rent line. Use a plus sign (+) followed by a number to indicate a
line following the current line. For example:
-10,+10 L

displays 10 lines preceding the current line, the current line, and 10 lines
following the current line. Note the use of the comma between adjacent
line numbers.
Mnewpage>
• You can enter multiple commands on one line usmg an appropriate
separator. When you enter an Edit command «line», subsequent
commands must be separated from <line> by a semicolon. For all
other commands, one command may follow another separated by either a
comma or a space. In the case of a Search or Replace command, however,
<string> must be ended by I CTRL HI] instead of I Return I.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-3

 The following command allows you to edit line 15, then list lines 10
through 20:
15;-5.+5L

In the next example, the command instructs EDLIN to search for "This
string", then display the preceding five lines and the following five lines
containing the matched string. If no match is found for the search string,
the lines listed will be those lines relative to the current line:
S This string ICTRLI-QD -5.+5L

4-4 EDLIN Command Reference

EDLIN Hints

• You can insert a control character (such as I CTRL ~@]) into text by
preceeding it with I CTRL HI), then typing the letter (such as C) without
I CTRL I. I CTRL ~[YJ tells MS-DOS to recognize the next letter as the
corresponding control character.
You can also use a control character in any of the string argmnents for
the Search or Replace commands using this method. For example:
D S I CTRL ~[YJ Z is the command to search for the first occurrence
of I CTRL ~0 in a file.
D R I CTRL ~[YJ Z [CTRL ~0 f 00 is the comnland to replace all
occurrences of I CTRL H~ with "foo".
D S I CTRL ~[YJ C I CTRL 1-0 bar is the command to replace all
occurrences of I CTRL H~J with "bar".
D To insert I CTRL ~[YJ into the text, simply type I CTRL}[YJv.
• The I CTRL ~0 character is read as an end-of-file mark by EDLIN. If
I CTRL ~0 appears in your file, you use the IB switch to tell EDLIN to
ignore these control characters and show you the entire file.
• The current line is the last line edited or the line currently being edited.
EDLIN marks the current line with an asterisk (*). For example:
1: This is the first line of my new file.
2: *
• As with MS-DOS commands, EDLIN commands become effective only
after you press I Return I.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-5

EDLIN Syntax
The following syntax notation will be used in this chapter.
<> Parameters enclosed by angle brackets represent data you must enter.
[] Information enclosed in square brackets is optional.
CAPS Letters and words in capital letters are commands or portions of
statements that must be entered exactly as shown

4-6 EDLIN Command Reference

EDLIN Command Options
EDLIN commands that use options are entered in the following form:
[ <parameter>] COMMAND [<parameter>]

The EDLIN parameters are:

1. <line> indicates you must specify a line number. Three possible entries
can represent this parameter:
a. Enter a decimal integer from 1 to 65529. If you specify a number
greater than the number of lines in the file, the line number is
equal to the number after the last line number in the file.
- -

b. Enter a pound sign (#) to specify the line after the last line in
memory. This has the same effect as specifying a number greater
than the number of lines in memory.
c. Enter a period (.) to specify the current line. The current line
indicates the location of the last change to the file, but it is not
necessarily the last line displayed. The current line is marked by
an asterisk (*) between the line number and the first character of
text in the line. For example:
10:*FIRST character of text
2. <n> indicates you must specify the number of lines. This parameter is
used only with the Write and Append commands. Thus, when you use
the <n> parameter, you enter the number of lines you wish to load from,
or write to, the disc.
3. <string> indicates you must enter one or more characters to represent
text to be searched for, replaced, or deleted. This parameter is used with
the Search and Replace commands. Each <string> must be terminated
by I CTRL ~m or I Return I (see the Replace command for details). No spaces
should be left between a string and its command letter, unless you want
those spaces to be part of the string.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-7

EDLIN Commands
EDLIN commands are described in detail in the remaining pages of this chapter.

4-8 EDLIN Command Reference

The Append Command

Purpose
The Append command adds the specified number of lines from a disc file to the
end of the file being edited in memory.

Syntax

[<n>]A
<n> is the number of lines you wish to append from your disc file to the
file in memory.

Operation
When you start ED LIN and specify an existing file, ED LIN will load lines until
memory is 75% full.
If your file is too large to load completely, you will have to edit that portion of
the file that was loaded, then save some of the edited lines to the disc in order to
free memory for more lines. You can then load the remaining lines into memory
using the Append command. (Refer to the Write command for information on
how to save edited lines to a disc.)
If you do not specify the number of lines to append, lines are appended to memory
until available memory is 75% full; no action will be taken if available memory is
already 75% full.
When the Append command has read the last line of a file into memory, the
message:
End of input file

is displayed.

Example
To load 23 lines from the specified disc file to memory, enter:
23a

EDLIN Command Reference 4-9

The Copy Command

Purpose
The Copy command copies a range of lines to a specified line number. If you use
the <count> option, the Copy command can be repeated a specified number of
times.

Syntax

[<fiine>] , [<lline>] , <dline> , [<count>]C

<!line> is the first line in the range of lines to be copied.
< lline > is the last line in the range of lines to be copied.
<dline> is the line number location (destination) where lines are to be copied;
the copied lines are placed before this line.
< count> is the number of times the specified range is to be copied; count must
be an unsigned integer.

Operation
If the <count> parameter is not specified, lines are copied once.
If either first line or last line is omitted, the default is the current line. This
results in the current line being copied to that location.
Your file is renumbered automatically after the copy is completed, and the first
of the copied lines becomes the current line. For example:
1.5.8c

copies lines 1 through 5 to line 8 and line 8 becomes the current line.
If line numbers overlap, you will receive the following error message:
Entry error

4-10 EDLIN Command Reference

You must retype your copy command to recover. For example, the command
3,20,15c

is in error because it instructs EDLIN to copy lines 3 through 20 and insert them
before line 15.
When copying is completed, EDLIN displays the * command prompt.

Examples
Assume the following file is in memory and ready to edit:
1: People usually pOint at what they want,
2: which is why Hewlett-Packard developed
3: HP Touch -- a special touch sensitive
4: screen that's available with
5:*HP Series 300 computers.

You can copy this entire block of text by entering:

1,5,6c

The result is:

1: People usually point at what they want,
2: which is why Hewlett-Packard developed
3: HP Touch -- a special touch sensitive
4: screen that's available with
5: HP Series 300 computers.
6:*People usually point at what they want,
7: which is why Hewlett-Packard developed
8: HP Touch -- a special touch sensitive
9: screen that's available with
10: HP Series 300 computers.

To copy lines and place them within this text, you must specify <dline> to tell
EDLIN where to put them. To copy lines 2 through 5 and place them before line
7, enter:
2,5,7c

EDLIN Command Reference 4-11

The resulting file will look like this:
1: People usually pOint at what they want.
2: which is why Hewlett-Packard developed
3: HP Touch -- a special touch sensitive
4: screen that's available with
5: HP Series 300 computers.
6: People usually point at what they want.
7:*which is why Hewlett-Packard developed
8: HP Touch -- a special touch sensitive
9: screen that's available with
10: HP Series 300 computers.
11: which is why Hewlett-Packard developed
12: HP Touch -- a special touch sensitive
13: screen that's available with
14: HP Series 300 computers.

In both examples, lines were renumbered by EDLIN.

4-12 EDLIN Command Reference

The Delete Command

Purpose
The Delete command deletes a specified range of lines in a file.

Syntax

[<fiine>] [, <lline>] 0
<fiine> is the first line in the range of lines to be deleted.
< lline > is the last line in the range of lines to be deleted.

Operation
EDLIN supplies default values for the first line and the last line if one or both
are omitted. If you omit the first line, as in:
, <lline>d

deletion begins with the current line and ends with the line specified by <lline>.
The comma is required to indicate the missing first line parameter.
If you omit the last line parameter, as in:
<line>d or <line>,d

only the specified line is deleted.

If you omit both parameters, as in:
o
only the current line is deleted, and the line following the deleted line becomes
the current line. The line following the deleted range becomes the current line
even if the deleted range includes the last line in memory. The current line, and
any following lines, are renumbered.
When deletion is complete, EDLIN displays the * command prompt.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-13

Examples
Assume that the following file is ready to edit:
1: This sample has been written
2: to demonstrate dynamic line number generation.
3: See what happens when
4: you use Delete and Insert

25: (the D and I commands)

26: to edit the text
27:* in your file.

To delete multiple lines, enter:

5,24d

The result is:

1: This sample file has been written
2: to demonstrate dynamic line number generation.
3: See what happens when
4: you use Delete and Insert
5:*(the D and I commands)
6: to edit the text
7: in your file.

To delete a single line, enter:

6d

The result is:

1: This sample file has been written
2: to demonstrate dynamic line number generation.
3: See what happens when
4: you use Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)
6:*in your file.

4-14 EDLIN Command Reference

To delete a range of lines from the following file:
1: This sample file has been written
2: to demonstrate dynamic line number generation.
3:*See what happens when
4: you use Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)
6: in your file.

enter the following EDLIN command, which deletes from the current line (3) to
line 6:
,6d

The result is:

1: This sample file has been written
2: to demonstrate dynamic line number generation.

Notice'that the lines are automatically renumbered.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-15

The Edit Command

Purpose
The Edit command allows you to edit one line of text.

Syntax

[<line>]
<line> is the number of the line you want to edit; it may be expressed as a
decimal integer, a pound sign (#), a period (.), or I Return I.

Operation
Any of the entries for <line>, described in the section on EDLIN Command
Options, can be used depending on the line you wish to edit.
When you have specified a line number and pressed I Return I, EDLIN will display
the line; below the line to be edited, EDLIN will display the line number. If you
only press I Return I, EDLIN will assume you meant the line after the current line.
To replace the line with a n~w line, simply type the new line and enter it into your
file by pressing I Return I. If you wish to edit the line without retypi"ng it, you can
use any of the MS-DOS editing keys described in the chapter titled "Executing
Commands" in Using the Series 300 DOS Coprocessor. The existing line serves
as the template until the I Return 1 key is pressed.
If you decide not to edit the line, you can keep the present line by positioning the
cursor under the first character or past the last character on the line and pressing
I Return I. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor.

Caution If you position the cursor by entering characters, including spaces

entered by pressing the space bar, you will lose all or part of the
data on the line. Be sure to use the arrow keys to position the
cursor.

4-16 EDL1N Command Reference

Example
Assume the following file is ready to edit:
1: This is a sample file created
2: to demonstrate what happens
3: when you edit line
4:*four.

To edit the fourth line, enter the line number, press I Return I, and see the following
display:

4:*four.
4:*

To edit the line using the MS-DOS editing keys, enter:

To Do This ... Type This ... EDLIN Response

Enter Insert mode I I nsert char I
Type in the data number 4: number_

Copy All [ill 4: number four.

Save changes I Return I *

Your file will now read:

1: This is a sample file created
2: to demonstrate what happens
3: when you edit line
4:*number four.

You can either continue to add lines starting with line 5, or leave the edit mode
by pressing I Return I.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-17

The End Command

Purpose
The End command ends the editing session, saves the edited file on the disc, and
returns you to the MS-DOS command prompt.

Syntax

Operation
The End command saves the edited file on the disc under the name entered
when you accessed EDLIN, renames the original input file by adding the .BAK
extension, and exits EDLIN. If the input file was created during the editing
session, no .BAK file is created.
Because the End command has no options, you cannot tell EDLIN on which drive
to save your file. Your file will be saved on the disc in the current directory of the
active drive unless you named a different drive and directory when you entered
EDLIN.

Caution You must be certain that your disc contains enough free space
for your entire file. If there is not enough space available, the
save operation will be aborted and all or part of your file will
be lost. In this case, your original file will not be renamed with
a filename extension of .BAK, and the portion of data that was
saved to the disc, if any, will have an extension of .$$$.

When your End command has been executed, you will be returned to the MS-
DOS command prompt.

4-18 EDLIN Command Reference

The Insert Command

Purpose
The Insert command inserts lines of text immediately before the specified line.
When you create a new file, the Insert command allows you to begin writing
(inserting) lines.

Syntax

[<line>] I
<line> is the line number before which you wish to insert lines.

Operation
When you enter the <line> Insert command, lines are inserted immediately
before the line number specified. Entering the Insert command without
specifying <line>, or by specifying <line> as a period (.), causes lines to be
inserted immediately before the current line. Successive line numbers appear
automatically each time a line is entered by pressing I Return I.
When the insert is completed, the line immediately following the inserted lines
becomes the current line, and all line numbers following the inserted lines are
incremented by the number of lines inserted.
If you specify a line number greater than the last line in your file, or if you specify
the pound sign (#) as the line number, lines are inserted after the last line in
memory. In this case, the last line inserted becomes the current line.
Press I CTRL HBreak 1or I CTRL H1J to leave Insert mode and return to the EDLIN
prompt.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-19

Examples
Assume the following file is ready to edit:
1: This is a sample file used to demonstrate
2: dynamic line number generation.
3: See what happens when you use
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)
6: to edit text
7: *in your file.

To insert text before line 4, enter:

and insert two new lines of text:

4:*First new line of text
5:*second new line of text
6*

and press I CTRL H~]' Now enter L to list the file. The result is:
1: This is a sample file used to demonstrate
2: dynamic line number generation
3: See what happens when you use
4: First new line of text
5: Second new line of text
6:*Delete and Insert
7: (the D and I commands)
8: to edit text
9: in your file.

Placing the two inserted lines at the end of file 1 gives:

1: This is a sample file used to demonstrate
2: dynamic line number generation.
3: See what happens when you use
4: Delete and Insert
6: (the D and I commands)
7: to edit text
8: in your file.
9: First new line of text
10:*Second new line of text

Note placement of the * to mark the current line in each example.

4-20 EDLIN Command Reference
The List Command

Purpose
The List command displays a specified range of lines; the current line remains
unchanged.

Syntax

[<fiine>J [<, lline>} L

<fiine> specifies the first line in the range to be listed.
< lline> specifies the last line in the range to be listed.

Operation
If you enter the List command with both options specified, the specified range
will be listed. Default values are supplied by EDLIN if one or both of the options
are omitted.
If you omit both options, 23 lines will be displayed-II lines before the current
line, the current line, and 11 lines following the current line. If there are fewer
than 11 lines before the current line, additional lines following the current line
will be displayed to make a total of 23 lines.
If you omit the first line option and specify the last line option, as in:
• <line>L

listing will begin 11 lines before the current line and end with the specified last
line. (Note that the beginning comma is required to indicate the omitted first
option.) If the specified last line is more than 11 lines before the current line, the
listing will be the same as if you had omitted both options.
If you omit the last line option, as in:
<fline>L

23 lines will be displayed, starting with the specified <£line>.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-21

Examples
Assume the following file is ready to edit:
1: This is a samPle file used to demonstrate
2: dynamic line number generation.
3: See what happens when you use
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)

15:*The current line contains an asterisk.

26: to edit text

27: in your file.

To list a range of lines without reference to the current line, enter:

2.51

The result is:

2: dynamic line number generation.
3: See what happens when you use
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)

To list a range of lines beginning with the cur!ent line, enter:

.. 261

The result is:

15:*The current line contains an asterisk.

(11 lines)

26: to edit text

4-22 EDLIN Command Reference

To list a range of 23 lines centered around the current line (line 15 in our example),
enter:
1

The result is:

4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)

13: The current line is listed in the middle.

14: The current line remains unchanged.
15:*The current line contains an asterisk.

26: to edit text.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-23

The Move Command

Purpose
The Move command moves one line or a range of lines to the line specified.

Syntax

[<ftine>]. [<lline>]. <dline> M

<ftine> is the first line in the range of lines to be Inoved.
<lline> is the last line in the range of lines to moved.
<dline> is the destination line number of the first line in the range of lines to
be moved.

Operation
If either the first line or last line parameter is omitted, it will default to the
current line. When the move has been completed, the first line moved becomes
the current line, and lines are renumbered according to the direction of the move.
For example, the command:
, +25, 100m

moves text from (current line) to (current line + 25) to line 100, and line 100
becomes the new current line.
If the line number parameters overlap, EDLIN will display the following error
message:
Entry Error

To recover, retype the command using correct paraIneters.

Example
To move lines 20 through 30 to line 100, enter:
20,30, 100m

4-24 EDLIN Command Reference

The Page Command

Purpose
The Page command lists a specified range of lines one page (23 lines) at a time.

Syntax

[<fline>)[, <lline>] P
<fline> is the first line in the range of lines to be listed.
< lline > is the last line in the range of lines to be listed.

Operation
The Page command pages through a range of lines or an entire file, displaying 23
lines at a time. It differs from the List command in that it changes the current
line to the last line displayed.
If the first line parameter is omitted, it defaults to the current line plus one. If
the last line parameter is omitted, 23 lines are listed, and the new current line
becomes the last line displayed.

Example
To display the first 23 lines of your file, and move the current line to the last line
listed, enter:
lp

The current line is the last line displayed.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-25

The Quit Command

Purpose
The Quit command ends the current editing session without saving any changes
or additions.

Syntax

Operation
When you enter the Quit command, EDLIN prompts you to make certain you
want to exit EDLIN without saving changes made during the current editing
session. The following message is displayed:
Abort edit (YIN)?

Press [Y] if you want to quit the editing session. No editing changes will be saved,
and no .BAK file will be created. (Refer to the End command in this chapter for
more information about the .BAK file.)
Press []] to continue the editing session.

Caution When you start EDLIN and enter an existing file name, EDLIN
erases the previous copy of the file with the extension of .BAK to
make room for the new copy. If you respond Y to the Abort edit
(Y IN)? message, the backup copy of your file will be deleted.

4-26 EDLIN Command Reference

The Replace Command

Purpose
The Replace command replaces all occurrences of a string of text in the specified
range with a specified string of text, or with blanks.

Syntax
[<jline>J[, <lline>1(? ] R [<stringl >1
I [CTRL 1-[IJ<string2>]
<fline> specifies the first line to search for < stringl >.
<lline> specifies the last line to search for <stringl >.
? instructs EDLIN to display an "OK?" prompt to verify correct-
ness of each replacement.
<stringl > is the text to be replaced.
ICTRL ~[IJ separates <string2> from <stringl >.
< string2 > is the text to replace <stringl >.

Operation
If one or both of the line parameters is omitted, EDLIN supplies default values. If
you omit the first line parameter, searching begins with the line after the current
line. If you omit the last line parameter ~ the search ends with the last line in
memory. If you omit both line parameters, EDLIN will search from the line
following the. current line to the last line in memory.
The Replace command displays changed lines each time they are changed. You
can specify the optional? parameter to request the "0. K.?" prompt after each
display of a modified line. This allows you to type Y (yes) if you want to keep
the line in its modified form. Enter any other alphanumeric character except Y if
you do not want the the modification; the line will be kept in its original form. In
either case, the search continues for further occurrences of the string, including
multiple occurrences within the same line.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-27

EDLIN has precise requirements for the syntax of the Replace command.
<stringl> begins with the character position immediately following the R
(Replace command letter), and continues until you press I GTRL Hl], or until you
press I Return 1 if <string2> is Oluitted.
<string2> begins in1mediately after I GTRL HI] and continues until you press
I Return I.
If <stringl > is terminated with I GTRL H1J and <string2> is omitted, <string2>
will be read as an "empty" string. For example:

R<stringl>1 GTRL I-W I Return 1

will delete all occurrences of < stringl > in the specified range.
If you omit both <stringl> and <string2>, EDLIN will re-use the search string
«stringl » entered with the most recent Search or Replace command, and
will re-use the replacement text string «string2» entered in the last Replace
comnland. Unless you are certain you know the content of your previous Search
and Replace commands, it is a good idea to supply these parameters.
When the Replace operation is complete, the last line changed becomes the
current line.
You can place more than one command on a line containing a Replace command
by terminating the replacement string with I GTRL ~W; then begin the next
command in the following character position.

Example
Assume the following file is ready to edit:
1: This is a sample file
2: used to demonstrate dynamic line numbers.
3 See what happens when you use
4: Delete and Insert
5: (the D and I commands)
6: to edit text
7: in your file.
8: The insert command can place new lines
9: in the file; there is no problem
10: because the line numbers are dynamic;
11: they will go all the way to 65529.
12:*This is the last line.

4-28 EDLIN Command Reference

To replace the string "and" with the string "or" in lines 2 through 12, enter:
2.12 Rand! CTRL I-morl Return I

The result, which is not very satisfactory, follows:

4: Delete or Insert
5: (the D or I commors)
8: The insert commor can place new lines

Because of the syntax requirements of this command, EDLIN does not differen-
tiate between individual words and strings within words; for this reason, it is a
good idea to use the ? parameter to check and verify replacements before they
are made. The same command entered with the? parameter:
2. 12?Rand! CTRL 1-[IJorl Return I

will be executed in the following way:

4: Delete or Insert
O.K.? Y
5: (The D or I commands)
O.K.?Y
5: (The D or I commors)
O.K.?N
8: The insert commor can place new lines
O.K.?N
*
The result will be far more satisfactory. You can use the list command to check
the results:

4: Delete or Insert
5: (The D or I commands)

8: The insert command can place new lines

EDLIN Command Reference 4-29

The Search Command

Purpose
The Search command searches a range of lines to locate a specified string of text.

Syntax

[<fline>] [, <lline>] [7 ] S <string>

<fline> is the first line in the range of lines to be searched.
<lline> is the last line in the range of lines to be searched.
7 instructs EDLIN to prompt "O.K.7" when the search string is found.
<string> is a string to be searched for and matched; it must be terminated with
I Return I.

Operation
The string you wish to have matched by the Search command must be exact as
to uppercase and lowercase letters. For example, if you enter a search string in
all uppercase letters, only uppercase occurrences will be matched.
When the first line containing the specified string has been found and displayed,
the search will end unless you have used the 7 option. The first line found that
matches the specified string becomes the current line. If no match is found, the
message Not found will be displayed.
If the 7 option is included in the command, EDLIN will display the first line
with a matching string; it will then prompt you with the message o. K.? If you
press either 1YJ or I Return I, the line will become the current line and the search
will terminate. If you press any other alphanumeric key, the search will continue
until another match is found, or until all lines have been searched and the Not
found message has been displayed.
If you omit either of the first line or last line parameters, the system provides
default values. If you omit the first line parameter, <line> defaults to the line
following the current line. If you omit the last line parameter, <Uine> defaults

4-30 EDLIN Command Reference

to the last line in memory. If you omit both line parameters, the system searches
from the line following the current line to the last line in memory.
If you do not enter a string, the Search command will use the last search string
that was entered in a Replace or Search command. Unless you are certain you
know the content of the previous Replace and Search commands t it is a good idea
to supply this parameter.
ED LIN has exact syntax requirements for the Search command. The search string
must begin at the character position immediately following the S, and continue
until you cud the string by pressing I Return I.
You can place more than one command on a line containing a Search command by
terminating the Search command with I CTRL HI]; then begin the next command
in the following character position.

Examples
Assume the following file is ready to edit:
1: This is a sample file that
2: will demonstrate
3: the Search command
4: using the
5: optional? parameter
6: and the required <string>
7:*parameter.

To search for the first occurrence of and in the file, enter:

1,7Sand

or
1, Sand

or
1Sand

You will see the following display:

3: the Search Text command.
*

EDLIN Command Reference 4-3-1

The command is terminated, and line 3 has become the current line. As with the
Replace command, EDLIN has not differentiated between the word "and" and
the letters and in the word command. As a result, this may not be the "and"
you were searching for. You can continue the search by simply entering the letter
S. The search will continue using the previous search string; searching will begin
with the line following the current line, which is the line last found. Now, in
response to your search command, you will see:
*1,7 Sand
3: the Search Text command

6: and required string

*
Another occurrence of "and" is found and the command is terminated; line 6 has
has now become the current line.
You can also search for strings using the? parameter, which causes each matching
line to be displayed until the specified range is exhausted. For example:
*1,7?Sand
3: the search Text command.
O.K.? N
6: and required string
O.K.? Y
*
The search conlmand is terminated and line 6 becomes the current line.

4-32 EDLIN Command Ref~rence

The Transfer Command

Purpose
The Transfer command merges the contents of a specified file to a specified
location in the file currently being edited.

Syntax

[<line>] T [<pathname>}
<line> specifies the line number location where <pathname> will be
merged with the current file.
<pathname> specifies the file to be merged with the current file.

Operation
The contents of the file specified by <pathname> will be inserted ahead of the
specified line in the file being edited, and all line numbers will be adjusted
beginning with the first line merged.
If <line> is omitted, it defaults to the current line.
The file being merged is read from the current directory of the specified drive or
the active drive. If a path was specified when you started EDLIN, that path will
be the current directory for that drive for the duration of the current EDLIN
session; subsequent Transfer commands for that drive must be satisfied from the
same directory.

EDLIN Command Reference 4-33

The Write Command

Purpose
The Write command writes a specified number of lines from memory to the disc.

Syntax

[<n>] W
<n> is the number of lines, starting with line 1, you wish to write to disc.

Operation
When you start EDLIN, lines are read into your system's memory until memory
is 75% full. The remaining portion of memory is kept available to add data during
editing.
If your file is too large to fit into memory, or if it becomes too large as a result of
editing, you must save (write) some lines on to your disc to create more room in
memory for editing, or for the remainder of your EDLIN file. The Write command
allows you to save a specified number of lines from memory on to your disc so
you can add more lines to memory. Use the Append command, described earlier
in this chapter, to add more lines.
Lines are saved (written on your disc) beginning with line 1. Lines remaining in
memory are renumbered starting with 1.

4-34 EDLIN Command Reference

 5
DEBUG Command Reference
The DEBUG program provides an environment to test binary and executable
object files. Whereas EDLIN is available to alter source files, DEBUG can be
used for executable files.
DEBUG is an advanced program; it deals with topics such as 8086 family
architecture, assembly language programming, and other topics which are more
advanced than other MS-DOS concepts. We assume the reader has some
familiarity with these related topics.
DEBUG eliminates the need to reassemble a program to see if a problem has
been fixed by a minor change to the code; it allows you to alter the contents of a
file or of a CPU register, and then to immediately execute your program to test
your changes.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-1

Entering DEBUG Commands
Each DEBUG command consists of a single letter followed by one or more
parameters. If you enter a DEBUG command incorrectly, DEBUG will prompt
you by reprinting the command line and pointing to the error with the up-arrow
character followed by the word "error."
For example:
des: 100 es: 110
-Error

All DEBUG commands can be aborted at any tinle by pressing I CTRL HBreak I.
I CTRL HNum lock I suspends the display of data so that you can read it before it
scrolls off the display; and you can restart the display by pressing allY alphabetic
or nunleric key.
Any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters may be used in DEBUG
commands and their parameters.

5-2 DEBUG Command Reference

DEBUG Command Parameters
All DEBUG commands, except the Quit command, accept parameters. Parame-
ters may be separated by either the space or comma delimiter, but a delimiter is
only required between two consecutive hexadecimal values. Thus, the following
cOInmands are equivalent:
des: 100 110
d cs: 100 110
d • c s : 100. 11 0

Parameter definitions are the same for each DEBUG command that uses them.
The DEBUG parameters and their definitions are shown below:
Parameter Action
<drive> A one-digit hexadecimal value that indicates which drive a file
will be loaded from or written to. These values designate the
drives as follows: 0 = A:, 1 = B:, 2 = C:, ...
<byte> A two-digit hexadecimal value to be placed in or read from an
address or register.
<ree> A 1- to 3-digit hexadecimal value that indicates the logical record
number on the disc and the number of disc sectors to be written
or loaded. Logical records correspond to sectors.
<value> Up to four hexadecimal digits that specify a port number; or the
number of times a command should be repeated.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-3

<address> A two-part designation consisting of either an alphabetic segment
register designation or a four-digit segment address plus an offset
value. The segment designation or segment address may be
omitted, in which case the default segment is used. DS is
the default segment for all commands except Go, Load, Trace,
Unassemble, and Write, for all of which the default segment is
CS. All numeric values are hexadecimal. For example:
CS:Ol00
04BA:Ol00

The colon is required between a segment designation (whether

numeric or alphabetic) and an offset. See the next section enti-
tled "Memory Addressing on the HP Series 300 DOS Coproces-
sor" for more information on the address parameter.
<range> Two addresses, as in < address> < address>; or one address
followed by "L" and a value, as in <address> L <value>.
< value> specifies the number of lines the command should
operate on and L80 is assumed. This second syntax for < range>
cannot be used if another hex value follows the range because
the hex value would be interpreted as the second address of the
range. For example:
CS: 100 110
CS:l00 L 10
CS: 100

are all legal specifications for <range>. The following is illegal:

CS: 100 CS: 110
-Error

The maximum value for <range> is 10000 hex. To specify a

value of 10000 hex within four digits, type 0000 (or 0).

5-4 DEBUG Command Reference

<list> A series of byte or string values. < list> must be the last
parameter on a command line. For example:
fcs:100 42 45 52 54 41

<string> Any number of characters delimited by either single or double

quotation marks. Quotation marks within a delimited string
must be doubled. For example:
'This "string" is legal'
'This "string" is legal"
"This " "string 'll' is legal ll

'This 'string' is not legal'

"This "string" is not legal"

Note that double quote marks are not necessary in the following
strings:
"This "string" is not needed"
'This ""string"1I is not needed"

The ASCII values of the characters in the string are used as a

<list> of byte values.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-5

Memory Addressing on the HP Series 300 DOS
Coprocessor
Before you run DEBUG, it will help you to understand how addresses are stored
in the system's memory.
Every byte of RAM has a unique address which may be stored in up to four bytes
(which equal 2 words). This format allows 65 536 unique addresses. To increase
the number of possible addresses in RAM, the 8086 family of processors employ
an algorithm in which the first word is multiplied by 10 (Hex) and added to the
second word; this allows 1 048 576 unique addresses.
To accommodate the increased size of RAM and improve its management, four
special registers were created in the 80286 processor. These registers hold the
first word so that programmers can, in most cases, deal only with the second
word called the "offset."
Each of these special registers holds the first address of a "segment" of memory
that contains up to 65,536 bytes of RAlVL For this reason, these registers are
called "segment registers". Each register has a special purpose as indicated by
its name: CS (code segrnent), DS (data segment), SS (stack segment), and ES
(extra segment).
If you load a program (code) into memory, the code segment register will contain
the first word of the address. For example, if the address in the code segment
register is 20A2, you may view the first portion of your program by entering
either of the following conlmands:
dcs:l00 (offset)
d20A2:100 (address + offset)

In the above examples,

d represents the DEB U G Dump command (explained III more
detail later in this chapter)
cs refers to the code segInent register
20A2H is the address in the code segment register, and
lOOH is the offset in hexadecimal.

5-6 DEBUG Command Reference

In some instances, you do not need to use either the segment name or its address
and offset in conjunction with a specific DEBUG command. The Load command,
for example, automatically loads at a default address; and when you enter the
Dump command without an address specification, you will see the first portion
of your program displayed on your screen. See individual command descriptions
for more details.
Using the actual address rather than naming the register (i.e., 20A2 rather than
cs) can cause problems. For example, if you load to an address instead of using
the default, you can overwrite the operating system, or anything else in memory,
while using DEBUG. For this reason, it is a good idea to specify a register or use
the default.

Caution Most DEBUG commands, when used incorrectly, can overwrite

critical areas of memory and "crash" your computer system. If
you do make such an error, you can usually recover by performing
one of the following steps:
1. Perform a I CTRL HE!"}I DEL I reset. If this does not work,
2. Exit the current DOS session, then start a new one.
We strongly recommend that you read each command description
carefully before using it.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-7

How to Start DEBUG
The syntax to run DEBUG is:

DEBUG
or

DEBUG [<file name> [< arglist >II

When you enter the DEBUG command without parameters, DEBUG responds
with:

Because no file name has been specified, current memory, disc sectors, or disc
files can be worked on using any of the DEBUG conlmands.

Caution When DEBUG is started, it sets up a program header at offset

o in the program's work area. You can overwrite this header
without consequences if no <filespec> is given to DEBUG. If
you are debugging a .COM or .EXE file, however, do not tamper
with the progranl header below address 5CH (the H stands for
Hexadecinlal, and will be used throughout this chapter). If you
do, DEBUG Illay not be able to terminate correctly when you
quit. Do not attempt to restart a program after the message
Program terminated normally

is displayed. You must reload the program using the Name and
Load commands for it to run properly.

5-8 DeBUG Command Reference

You can also start DEBUG using a command line, as in
DEBUG [[d:] [path]file name[<arglist>]]

When you use this method, the file you specify will be loaded into memory. MS-
DOS determines the lowest segment after the end of its resident portion. MS-DOS
will load a Program Segment Prefix (PSP) at this address. Refer to the MS-DOS
Programmer's Reference Manual (an optional manual you may order) for details
about the PSP. The PSP is IOOH bytes long. The program file is then loaded in
after it.
If the file has an extension of either .EXE or .HEX, the DS and ES segment
registers point to the PSP, and the CS, SS, SP, and IP registers are set to the
value specified in the .EXE or .HEX file. .HEX files are assumed to be in Intel
.HEX format and are converted into executable format as they are loaded.
For all other files, all segment registers point to the PSP, the IP register is set to
IOOH, and the SP register is set to FFFEH.
DEBUG also places the number of bytes in the program as a doubleword value in
BX:CX. The Least Significant word is placed in CX, the Most Significant word
in BX.
The initial values for the flags are:
NV UP E1 PL NZ NA PO NC
An <arglist> may be specified only if <file name> is present. The <arglist> is
a list of filename parameters and switches that are to be passed to <file name>.
Thus, when <file name> is loaded into memory, it is loaded as if it had been
started with the command:
A><file name> <arglist>

Here, <file name> is the file to be debugged, and the <argiist> is the command
line to be passed to the program when it is executed.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-9

DEBUG Commands
The remaining pages in this chapter describe DEBUG commands in detail. We
strongly recommend that you read information on DEBUG commands before you
attempt to use them. Many commands contain important notes and cautions.

5-10 DEBUG Command Reference

The Assemble Command

Purpose
The Assemble command assembles 8086, 8087, and 8088 mnemonics directly into
memory.

Syntax

A [<address>]

Operation
All numeric values are hexadecimal and must be entered as 1 - 4 characters. Prefix
mnemonics (such as JMP for Jump) must be specified in front of the opcode to
which they refer; or they may be entered on a separate line.
The segment override mnemonics are CS:, DS:, ES:, and SS:. The mnemonic for
the far return is RETF. String manipulation mnemonics must explicitly state the
string size. For example, use ~10VSW to move word strings, and MOVSB to
move byte strings.
The assembler will automatically assemble short, near, or far jumps and calls,
depending on the byte displacement to the destination address. These may be
overridden with the NEAR or FAR prefix. For example:
0100:0500 JMP 502 a 2-byte short jump
0100:0502 JMP NEAR 505 ; a 3-byte near jump
0100:0505 JMP FAR 50A ; a 5-byte far jump

The NEAR prefix may be abbreviated to NE, but the FAR prefix cannot be
abbreviated.
DEBUG cannot tell whether some operands refer to a word memory location
or to a byte memory location. In such a case, the data type must be explicitly
stated with one of the prefixes "WORD PTR" or "BYTE PTR." Acceptable
abbreviations are "WO" and "BY" respectively. For example:
NEG BYTE PTR [128]
DEC WO [S1]

DEBUG Command Reference 5-11

Nor can DEBUG tell whether an operand refers to a memory location or to
an immediate operand. DEBUG uses the common convention that an operand
enclosed in square brackets refers to a memory location. For example:
MOV AX,21 ;Load AX with 21H
MOV AX, [21] ;Load AX with contents
;of location DS:21H

Two popular pseudo-instructions are available with Assemble. The DB opcode

assembles byte values directly into memory; the DW opcode assembles word
values directly into memory. For example:
DB 1,2,3,4, "THIS IS AN EXAMPLE"
DB 'THIS IS A QUOTE:'"
DB "THIS IS A QUOTE: '"

DW 1000,2000,3000, "BACH"

Assemble supports all forms of register indirect commands. For example:

ADD BX,34[BP+2] . [SI-1J
POP [BP+DIJ
PUSH [SI]

All opcode synonyms are also supported. For example:

LOOPZ 100
LOOPE 100

JA 200
JNBE 200

Press the I Return I key without typing an op code to terminate the Assemble
command; you can terminate the command at any byte position.

5-12 DEBUG Command Reference

The Compare Command

Purpose
The Compare command compares the portion of memory specified by <range>
to a portion of the same size beginning at a specified address.

Syntax

C> <range><address>

Operation
If <range> and <address> specify identical areas of memory, no comparison is
made and you are returned to the DEBUG command prompt.
If <range> and <address> are different, the non-matching bytes are displayed
in the following format:
<address1> <byte1> <byte2> <address2>

Example
To compare the block of memory from 100 to 1FFH with the block of memory
frOIn 300 to 3FFH, enter:
C100,1FF 300

or
C100L100 300

The two commands have the same effect.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-13

The Dump Command

Purpose
The Dump command displays the contents of the specified region of memory.

Syntax

D [<range>]

Operation
If you enter the D cOlnmand without parameters, 128 bytes are displayed at the
first address after the address displayed by the previous Dump command. If a
range of addresses is specified, the contents of the range are displayed.
The dump is displayed in two portions: a hexadecimal dump with each byte
shown as a hexadecimal value, and an ASCII durnp with bytes shown as their
corresponding ASCII characters. Nonprinting characters are denoted with a
period (.) in the ASCII portion of the display. Each display line shows 16 bytes
with a hyphen between the eighth and ninth bytes. Each displayed line begins
on a 16-byte boundary.
If you enter the command:
dcs:Ol00 L 20

or
cs:Ol00 011F

DEBUG displays the durnp in the following format:

207E:0100 48 50 20 56 65 63 74 72-61 20 54 6F 75 63 68 20
207E:0110 53 63 72 65 65 6E 00 00-00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

If you type the following conllnand:

D

the display is formatted as described above. Each line begins with an address:
incremented by 16 from the address on the previous line. Each subsequent D

5-14 DEBUG Command Reference

command entered without parameters displays the bytes immediately following
those last displayed.
If you type the command:
DCS: 100 L 20

the display will be formatted as described above, but 20H bytes will be displayed.
If you then type the command:
DCS:l00 115

the display will still be formatted in the same way but only the bytes in the range
of lines from 100H to 115H in the CS segment will be displayed.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-15

The Enter Command

Purpose
The Enter cornmand enters byte values into memory at the specified address.

Syntax

E <address> [< list> ]

Operation
If < address> is specified without the optional list, DEBUG displays the address
and its contents, then waits for your input. At this point, DEBUG expects you
will perform one of the following actions:
1. Replace a current byte value with a new value by entering the new value
after the current value. If the value you enter is not a legal hexadecimal
value, or if lnore than two digits are typed, the illegal extra character( s)
are not echoed.
2. Use the space bar to advance to the next byte; to change its value, simply
type the new value after the current value. If you space beyond an 8-byte
boundary, DEBUG starts a new display line with the address displayed
at the beginning.
3. Type a hyphen (-) to return to the preceding byte. If you decide to
change a byte prior to the current position, the hyphen returns the current
position to the previous byte, and a new line is started with the address
and its byte value displayed.
4. Press I Return I to terminate the Enter command. You can press I Return I to
ternlinate the cOlllInand at any byte position.
If the optional list of values is entered with the Enter comnland, byte values are
replaced automatically with new values. If an error occurs, no byte values are
replaced.

5-16 DEBUG Command Reference

Example
If you were to enter the following DEBUG command:
ECS: 100

DEBUG might respond by displaying

04Ba:0100 EB.

(The underscore represents the cursor.) To change this value to 41, type 41 as
shown below:
04BA:0100 EB.41_

To step through the subsequent bytes, press the SPACE bar to see:
04BA:0100 EB.41 10. 00. BC.

To change BCR to 42R, enter:

04BA:0100 EB.41 10. 00. BC.42

Now, to change lOR to 6FR, type the hyphen as many times as needed to return
the cursor to byte 0101R (value lOR), then replace lOR with 6FR:
04BA:0100 EB.41 10. 00. BC.42
04BA:0102 00.
04BA:0101 10.6F

Press I Return I to terminate the Enter connnand and return to the DEBUG
conlmand prompt.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-17

The Fill Command

Purpose
The Fill command fills the addresses In the specified range with the values
specified in the list.

Syntax

F <range><list>

Operation
If the specified range contains more bytes than the number of values in the
specified list, the list will be used repeatedly until all bytes in the range are filled.
If the list contains more values than the number of bytes in the range, the extra
values in the list will be ignored. If any of the memory in the range is not valid
(bad or non-existent), you will receive an error message. If a segment value is
not specified in the range, DS is assumed.

Example
Assume that you have entered the following DEBUG command:
F04BA:l00 L 100 42 45 52 54 41

DEBUG fills memory locations 04BA:IOO through 04BA:IFF with the bytes
specified. The five values are repeated until all lOOH bytes are filled.

5-18 DEBUG Command Reference

The Go Command

Purpose
The Go command executes the program currently in memory.

Syntax

G [= <address>] [<address> [<address> ... ]]

Operation
If the Go command is entered without parameters, the program in memory will
be executed as if it had been executed from the MS- DOS prompt.
If the =<address> parameter is set, execution begins at the specified address.
The equal sign (=) is required so that DEBUG can distinguish the start address
from breakpoint address( es).
When additional addresses are set, program execution stops at the first of those
addresses encountered, regardless of its position in the address list. When
program execution reaches a breakpoint, the registers, flags, and decoded
instructions are displayed for the last instruction executed. The result is the
same as if you had typed the Register command for the breakpoint address.
Up to ten breakpoints may be set. Breakpoints may be set only at addresses
containing the first byte of an 80826 opcode. If more than ten breakpoints are
set, DEBUG will return the BP error message.
The user stack pointer must be valid and have six bytes available for the Go
command. The Go command uses an IRET instruction to cause a jump to the
program under test. The user stack pointer is set, and the user flags, Code
Segment register, and Instruction Pointer are pushed on the user stack.
Thus, if the user stack is not valid or is too small, the operating system may crash.
An interrupt code (OCCH) is placed at the specified breakpoint address( es).
When an instruction with the breakpoint code is encountered, all breakpoint
addresses are restored to their original instructions. If execution is not halted

DEBUG Command Reference 5-19

at one of the breakpoints, the interrupt codes are not replaced with the original
instructions.

Example 1
Assume that you have entered the following command:
GCS:7550

The program currently in memory executes up to the address 7550 in the CS

segment. DEBUG then displays registers and flags, and then terminates the Go
command.
If you re-enter the Go command after a breakpoint has been encountered, the
program in memory restarts at the location of the breakpoint.
When you execute all or part of a program using Go, the registers and memory
may change; to run the program again, you should reload the program using the
Load command to reinitialize the registers and memory.

Example 2
Assume the IP is set to lOOH, the command
G 200

starts program execution at IP and stops at 200H.

If you had entered
G=100

execution would have begun at lOOH and continued to the end of the program.
If you had entered
G=100 200H

execution would have begun at lOOH and continued to 200H.

5-20 DEBUG Command Reference

The Hex Command

Purpose
The Hex command performs hexadecimal arithmetic on the two parameters
specified.

Syntax

H <value>< value>

Operation
This command is useful in calculating offsets from current or known addresses.
DEBUG first adds the two specified values, then subtracts the second value from
the first value. The results of these operations are displayed on one line; first the
sum, then the difference.

Example
You have entered the following DEBUG command:
H19F lOA

DEBUG first sums the two values, then subtracts lOAH from 19FH. The following
result is displayed:
02A9 0095

DEBUG Command Reference 5-21

The Input Command

Purpose
The Input command inputs and displays one byte from the port specified by the
value parameter.

Syntax

I <value>

Operation
A 16-bit port address may be specified as the value.

Example
Assume that you have entered the following command:
12F8

and that the byte at the port is 42H. DEBUG inputs the byte and displays the
following value:
42

Because MS-DOS function calls can be used inside programs, you should not find
it necessary to use the Input command.

5-22 DEBUG Command Reference

The Load Command

Purpose
The Load command loads a disc file or absolute disc sectors into memory.

Syntax

L [<address> [<drive><rec><rec>]]

Operation
To debug a disc file rather than absolute disc sectors, the file to be loaded must
have been named either when DEBUG was started, or using the DEBUG Name
command. Both the command to start DEBUG and the Name command create
a non-extended File Control Block at CS:5C. BX:CX is the number of bytes read.
If you enter the Load command without any parameters, DEBUG loads the
named file into memory beginning at address CS: 100 and sets BX:CX to the
number of bytes loaded.
If the Load command is entered with just an address parameter, loading begins
at the memory address specified.
If L is entered with all the parameters, absolute disc sectors are loaded rather
than a file. The specified records are taken from the specified drive and DEBUG
begins loading with the first record specified, and continues until the number of
sectors specified in the second record have been loaded.

Example
Assume that the following commands have been entered:
B>DEBUG
-NFILE.COM

DEBUG Command Reference 5-23

NFILE. COM is the DEBUG command to Name the file to be loaded into memory.
Now, to load FILE.COM, enter:
L

DEBUG loads FILE. COM and displays the DEBUG prompt. Assuming that you
want to load only portions of a file or certain records from disc, you can enter:
L04BA:100 2 OF 60

DEBUG will then load 109 (6D hex) records from drive 2 (C:) beginning with
logical record number 15 (OFH) into memory starting at address 04BA:OIOO.
When the records have been loaded, DEBUG again returns the "-" pronlpt.
If the file to be loaded has an . EXE extension, it is relocated to the load address
specified in the header of the .EXE file; the address parameter is always ignored
for .EXE files. The header itself is stripped from the .EXE file before it is loaded
into memory; thus the size of an .EXE file on disc will differ from its size in
memory.
If the file named with the Name command or specified when DEBUG is started
is a .HEX file, then entering the L command with no parameters causes DEBUG
to load the file beginning at the address specified in the .HEX file. If the L
command includes the address parameter, DEBUG adds the specified address to
the address found in the .HEX file to determine the start address for loading the
file. Registers BX:CX contain the a doubleword count of the number of bytes in
the program. The Least Significant word is stored in CX, the Most Significant
word in BX.

5-24 DEBUG Command Reference

The Move Command

Purpose
The Move command moves the block of memory in the specified range to the
location beginning at the specified address.

Syntax

M <range>< address>

Operation
If you instruct DEBUG to make an "overlapping" move (that is, one in which
part of the block overlaps some of the current address) the move will be performed
without loss of data because addresses that could be overwritten are moved first.
The sequence for moves from higher addresses to lower addresses is to move the
data beginning at the block's lowest address, then to work toward the highest.
The sequence for moves from lower addresses to higher addresses is to move the
data beginning at the block's highest address and to work toward the lowest.

Example
Assume that you enter:
MCS:100 110 CS:500

DEBUG will first move address CS:I10 to address CS:510; then CS:I0F to
CS:50F, and so on until CS: 100 is moved to CS:500. To see the results of the
Move, use the Dump command and specify the address specified for the Move
command. DEBUG will assume the segment of all addresses to be DS unless a
segment is specified.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-25

The Name Command

Purpose
The Name command sets a filename for a later Load or Write comnland, and/or
sets filename parameters.

Syntax

N <filename> [<filename> ... J

Operation
a
If you start DEBUG without naming file to be debugged, you must use the
Narne command before a file can be loaded. The Name command also accepts
parameters that are used by the file being debugged.
Assume you have entered the following commands:
B>DEBUG
-NFILE1.EXE
-L
-G

The Name command performs or enables the following steps:

1. Name sets FILE1.EXE as the filename to be used in any later Load or
Write commands during the current DEBUG session.
2. Name also sets FILEl.EXE as the first parameter used by any program
that is later debugged during the current DEBUG session.
3. The Load command loads the named FILEl.EXE into memory.
4. The Go command causes FILEl.EXE to be executed with FILEl.EXE as
the single filename parameter; that is, FILEl.EXE is executed as if
FILE1 FILE1.EXE

had been typed at the MS-DOS command prompt.

5-26 DEBUG Command Reference

A more useful group of commands might look like this:
B>DEBUG
-NFILE1.EXE
-L
-NFILE2.DAT FILE3.DAT
-G

In this series of commands, Name sets FILEl.EXE as the filename to be used

by the subsequent Load command. The Load command loads FILEl.EXE
into memory, and the Name command is used again, this time to specify
the parameters to be used by FILEl.EXE. Finally, when the Go command is
executed, FILEl.EXE is executed as if the following command had been entered:
B>FILEl FILE2.DAT FILE3.DAT

Note If a Write command were executed at this point, then FILEl.EXE,

the file being debugged, would be saved with the file name
FILE2.DAT. To avoid this, you should always execute a Name
command before either Load or Write.

Four regions of memory can be affected by the Name command:

CS:5C FCB for file 1
CS:6C FCB for file 2
CS:80 Count of characters
CS:81 Unparsed command line

A File Control Block (FCB) is set up at CS:5C for the first filename parameter
given to the Name command. If a second parameter is entered, then an FCB is
set up for it beginning at CS:6C.
The number of characters in the Name command, exclusive of the "N" itself, is
given at location CS:80. The actual stream of characters in the Name command,
again exclusive of the letter "N," begins at CS:81. Note that this stream
of characters may contain switches and delimiters that would be legal in any
command typed at the MS-DOS command level.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-27

Example
A typical use of the name command follows:
B>DEBUG PROG.COM
-NPARAMl PARAM2/C
-G

In this instance, the Go command executes the file in memory as if the following
command line has been typed from MS-DOS:
B>PROG PARAMl PARAM2/C

Testing and debugging therefore reflect a normal runtime environment for

PROG.COM.

5-28 DeBUG Command Reference

The Output Command

Purpose
The Output command sends the specified byte to the specified output port.

Syntax

a <value> <byte>

Operation
A 16-bit port address is allowed in the output command. If you enter:
02F8 4F

DEBUG will output the byte value 4F to output port 2F8.

Because MS-DOS function calls can be used inside programs, you should not find
it necessary to use the Output command.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-29

The Procedure Command

Purpose
The Procedure command executes one instruction and displays the contents of
all registers and flags and the decoded instruction.

Syntax

P [= <address>] [<value>]

Operation
The Procedure command operates exactly as the Trace command with the
exception that when a subroutine is encountered during a trace operation, it
is executed and the trace is resumed at the first line following the subroutine.
This command is most useful to skip over either a tested or well known procedure
in order to see the returned values of the next instruction in the current procedure.
One such example might be to execute MS-DOS function calls by tracing to
INT 21H, (the MS-DOS interrupt for an MS-DOS Function call) then to type
P and execute the function. DEBUG will return at the next instruction in your
sequence.
See the section on the Trace command later in this chapter for details on the
operation of this command.

5-30 DEBUG Command Reference

The Quit Command

Purpose
The Quit command terminates the DEBUG utility and returns the user to the
MS-DOS command prompt.

Syntax

Operation
The Quit command uses no parameters and terminates DEBUG without saving
the file currently in memory. You are returned to the MS-DOS command level.

Example
To end the current debugging session, enter:
Q

DEBUG will terminate, and control will return to MS-DOS.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-31

The Register Command

Purpose
The Register Command displays the contents of one or more CPU registers.

Syntax

R [< register - name>]

Operation
When DEBUG is started, the segment registers are set to the bottom of free
memory, the Instruction Pointer is set to OlOOH, all flags are cleared, and the
remaining registers are set to zero.
If no register-name parameter is used, the Register command dumps the register
save area and displays the contents of all registers and flags.
If a register-name is entered, the l6-bit value of that register is displayed in
hexadecimal, followed by a colon (:) prompt. You can then either enter a <value>
to change the register, or you can press I Return I if no change is needed.
Valid register-names are:
AX BP SS
BX SI CS
CX DI IP
DX DS PC
SP ES F

Note IP and PC both refer to the Instruction Pointer.

Any other entry for register-name will result in a BR error message (see the
section entitled DEBUG Error Messages for an explanation).

5-32 DEBUG Command Reference

If F is used as the register-name, DEBUG displays each flag with a two-ch~racter
alphabetic code. To alter any flag, type the opposite two-letter code.; the flags
are either set or cleared. The flags are listed in the following table with their
codes for SET and CLEAR:

Flag Name SET CLEAR

Overflow OV NV
Direction D N Decrement UP Increment
Interrupt EI Enabled DI Disabled

Sign NG Negative PL Plus

Zero ZR NZ
Auxiliary AC NA Carry

Parity PE Even PO Odd

Carry CY NC

When you type the command "RF", the flags are displayed in a row at the
beginning of a line in the order shown above. At the end of the list of flags,
DEBUG displays a hyphen (-); you may enter new flag values as alphabetic pairs
in any order. You do not have to leave spaces between the flag entries.
If more than one value is entered for a flag, DEBUG returns a DF error message.
If you enter a flag code other than those shown above, DEBUG returns a BF
error message. In both cases, the flags up to the error in the list are changed;
flags at the point of the error and following are not changed.
To exit the R command, press the I Return I key. Flags for which new values were
not entered remain unchanged.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-33

Example
If you enter:
R

DEBUG displays all registers, flags, and the decoded instruction for the current
location. If the location is CS: IIA, then the display will look similar to this:
AX=OEOO BX=OOFF CX=0007 DX=OlFF SP=039D BP=OOOO S1=005C D1=OOOO
DS=04BA ES=04BA SS=04BA CS=04BA IP=OllA NV UP DI NG NZ AC PE NC
04BA: 011A CD21 INT 21

If you enter:
RF

DEBUG will display the flags:

NV UP D1 NG NZ AC PE NC -

Now, if you enter a valid flag designation, in any order, with or without spaces,
as In:
NV UP D1 NG NZ AC PE NC - PLEICY I Return I

Debug will respond only with the DEBUG prompt. To see the changes, you
should enter either the R or RF command to see the following display:
RF
NV UP E1 PL NZ AC PE CY -

You can press I Return I to leave the flags this way, or specify new flag values.

5-34 DEBUG Command Reference

The Search Command

Purpose
The Search command searches the specified range for the specified list of bytes.

Syntax

S <range>< list>

Operation
The list may contain one or more bytes, each separated by a space or comma
delimiter. If the list contains more than one byte, only the first address of the
byte string is returned. Otherwise, all addresses of the byte in the range are
displayed. If no match is found, no address is displayed.

Example
If you enter:
SCS: 100 110 41

DEBUG will display a response similar to the following:

04BA:Ol04
04BA:Ol0D

DEBUG Command Reference 5-35

The Trace Command

Purpose
The Trace command executes one instruction and displays the contents of all
registers and flags and the decoded instruction.

Syntax

T [= <address>] [<value>]

Operation
If the optional =<address> parameter is entered, tracing occurs at the specified
address. The optional value causes DEBUG to execute and trace the number of
steps specified by < value>.
Because the Trace command uses the hardware trace mode of the 80286
microprocessor, you can also trace instructions stored in Read Only Memory.

Example
When you type
T

DEBUG displays the state of the registers and flags after the last instruction is
executed, and decodes the next instruction to be executed. Assuming that the
current position is 04BA:OllA, DEBUG might return this information:
AX=OEOO BX=OOFF CX=0007 OX=01FF SP=0390 BP=OOOO S1=005C 01=0000
DS=04BA ES=04BA SS=04BA CS=04BA 1P=011A NV UP 01 NG NZ AC PE NC
04BA: 011A C021 1NT 21

If you enter:
T=011A 10

DEBUG executes sixteen (10 hex) instructions beginning at OllA in the current
segment, and then displays all registers and flags for each instruction as it is
executed.

5-36 DEBUG Command Reference

The display continues to scroll until the last instruction is executed; when
scrolling stops, you can see the register and flag values for the last few instructions
performed. Remember that I CTRL HNum lock I suspends the display at any point
to allow you time to study the registers and flags for any instruction. Resume
scrolling by pressing any alphabetic or numeric character.
Tracing interrupts is possible, as is tracing INs and OUTs; however, most users
will not want to watch each instruction of an MS-DOS function call being
executed. For this reason, it is recommended that you use the P (Procedure)
command at INT 21H, the MS-DOS interrupt for an MS-DOS function call, and
at CALL instructions.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-37

The Unassemble Command

Purpose
The U nassemble command disassembles bytes and displays their corresponding
source statements with their addresses and byte values.

Syntax

U [<range>]

Operation
If you enter the U command without parameters, 20 hexadecimal bytes are
disassembled at the first address after the address displayed by the previous
Un assemble command.
If you type the U command with the <range> parameter, then DEBUG
disassembles all bytes in the range. If the <range> is given as an <address>
only, then 20H bytes are disassembled.
The display of disassembled code has the same appearance as a listing for an
assembled file.

5-38 DeBUG Command Reference

Example
If you enter
U04Ba: 100 Ll0

DEBUG disassembles 16 bytes beginning at address 04BA:0100:

04BA:Ol00 206472 AND [S1+72] ,AR
04BA:Ol03 69 DB 69
04BA:Ol04 7665 JBE 016B
04BA:Ol06 207370 AND [BP+D1+70] ,DR
04BA:Ol09 65 DB 65
04BA:Ol0A 63 DB 63
04BA:Ol0B 69 DB 69
04BA: otOe 66 DB 66
04BA:Ol0D 69 DB 69
04BA:OlOE 63 DB 63
04BA:Ol0f 61 DB 61

If you enter:
U04ba:Ol00 0108

you will see the following display:

04BA:Ol00 206472 AND [S1+72] ,AR
04BA:Ol03 69 DB 69
04BA:Ol04 7665 JBE 016B
04BA:Ol06 207370 AND [BP+D1+70] ,DR

If the bytes in some addresses are altered, the disassembler alters the instruction
statements. The U command can be typed for the changed locations, the new
instructions viewed, and the disassembled code used to edit the source file.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-39

The Write Command

Purpose
The Write command writes the file being debugged to a disc file.

Syntax

w[ < address> [< drive> < ree > < ree >]]

Operation
If you enter W with no parameters, BX:CX must already be set to the number
of bytes to be written; the file is written beginning from CS:IOO.
If the W command is entered with just an address, then the file is written
beginning at that address. Again, BX:CX must be set before you use the Write
command.
Note that if a file is loaded and modified, the name, length, and starting address
are all set correctly to save the modified file, so long as the length has not changed.
The file must have been named either when DEBUG was called, or with the N
(Name) command, described earlier in this section. Both the DEBUG call and
the N arne command format a filename properly in the normal format of a File
Control Block at CS:5C.
If the W command is entered with parameters, the write begins from the memory
address specified; the file is written to the specified drive; DEBUG writes the
file beginning with the logical record number specified by the first <rec>; and
DEBUG continues to write the file until the number of sectors specified in the
second <rec> have been written.

Caution Writing to absolute sectors is EXTREMELY dangerous because

the process bypasses the file handler.

5-40 DEBUG Command Reference

Debug Error Messages

Error Code Definition

BF Bad flag
You attempted to alter a flag, but the characters typed were
not one of the acceptable pairs of flag values. See the Register
command for the list of acceptable flag entries.
BP Too many breakpoints
You specified more than ten breakpoints as parameters to the
G (Go) command. Retype the Go command with ten or fewer
breakpoints.
BR Bad register
You typed the R command with an invalid register name. See
the Register command for the list of valid register names.
DF Double flag
You typed two values for one flag. You may specify a flag value
only once per RF command.

DEBUG Command Reference 5-41

 6
MS-LINK Reference
This chapter describes the MS-LINK utility. The first part of this chapter
describes MS-LINK in an abstract, theoretical way for the benefit of readers
who are not already familiar with this or similar programs. Readers who desire
only practical examples are encouraged to refer directly to the sections entitled
"Running MS-LINK" and "MS-LINK Examples."

MS-LiNK Reference 6-1

What MS-LINK is and What it Does
The MS-LINK utility is a program that requires a minimum of 50 Kbytes of
memory (40 Kbytes for code and data, and 10 Kbytes for run space). It
conlmunicates with the user by displaying prompts on the screen, to which the
user responds by entering the appropriate commands.
MS-LINK links modules of 80286 object code that have been created separately
by a compiler and/or assembler from the source code written by a programmer.
The object-code modules must be in the form of 80286 object-code (.OBJ) files.
MS-LINK transforms one or more object modules into one load module (the .EXE
file) .
As MS-LINK combines the object modules into an .EXE file, it resolves any
external references that the object modules make to symbols that are defined in
other modules. MS-LINK can then search one or more library files to find the
definition of any external references that it has not been able to resolve.
MS- LINK also produces a list file (. MAP) that shows the external references
which the program has resolved. This file also contains any error messages that
were generated during MS-LINK operations.
The output (RUN) file from MS-LINK is not bound to specific memory addresses.
Therefore, this file can be loaded and executed at any convenient address by your
computer's operating system.
MS-LINK uses as much available nlemory as possible. When it has used all of the
available memory, MS-LINK creates a disc file and becomes a virtual memory
linker.

6-2 MS-LiNK Reference

The following diagram shows the relationship between MS- LINK and other
elements of the system.

Non-Assembly
Assembly Source
Source

Compiler Assembler

Libraries Listing
MS-liNK
.lIB .MAP

Up to 8 libraries PUBLIC symbols

can be searched cross- referenced

Used only if Run

Run file
file is larger than VM.TMP
.EXE
memory

MS-LiNK Reference 6-3

Definition of Terms
The terms segment, group, and class appear throughout this discussion. Before
continuing, you should understand what these terms mean.
A segment is a contiguous area of memory that is up to 64 Kbytes long. A segment
can be located anywhere in 80286 memory adjacent to a paragraph (16-byte)
boundary. The contents of a segment are addressed by a segment-register/offset
pair.
A group is a set of segments that fit within 64 Kbytes of memory: that is, a
collection of segments that are addressed by a single segment register. Either
the assembler, the cOInpiler, or the user assigns the group name to the segments.
In the latter case, the user assigns the group name in the assembly-language
program. For high-level languages, the cOInpiler names the group of segments.
Segn1ents in memory are addressed via their group. Each group is addressed
by one segn1ent register. Each segment within a group is addressed by the
combination of a segment register and an offset. MS-LINK checks whether the
object modules in a group fit within the required 64 Kbytes of memory. If they
don't fit, MS-LINK displays an error message saying so.
A class is a collection of segments. The placement of segments in a class
controls the order and relative placement of segments in memory. The segments
in a class need not have the same address. The user assigns the class name
in an assembly-language program. For high-level languages (such as BASIC,
FORTRAN, COBOL, and PASCAL), the compiler assigns the class name. The
segments are placed in a class at compile time or at assembly time.
The segments in a class are loaded into memory contiguously. MS- LINK places
the segments within a class in the order in which it finds the segments in the
object files. A class precedes another class in memory only if a segment in the
first class precedes all of the segments in the second class during input to MS-
LINK. The classes, which can be loaded across 64 Kbyte boundaries, are divided
into groups for addressing purposes.

6-4 MS-LiNK Reference

To summarize, to use MS- LINK, you need to remember that:
• a paragraph is a memory area that is 16 bytes long,
• a segment is a memory area that is up to 64 Kbytes long,
• a group is a set of segments that occupies up to 64 Kbytes,
• and a class is a collection of contiguous seglnents that can be loaded into
lnemory consecutively across 64 Kbyte boundaries.
The following diagram illustrates the relationship between segments and groups
in memory.

Segment Segment Segment Segment Segment

1 2 3 4 5

Segment Segment Segment Segment Segment

6 7 8 9 10

Memory

Segment Segment Segment Segment Segment Segment

11 12 13 14 15 16

Segment Segment Segment Segment Segment Segment

17 18 19 20 21 22

Shaded area A group (64K bytes addressable)

MS-LiNK Reference 6-5

How MS-LINK Combines and Arranges Segments
MS- LINK can join the following rnodules of object code.
• Private combinations
• Public combinations
• Stack combinations
• Common combinations
These types are declared in the source module for the assembler or the compiler.
(The memory-combination type available in the MACRO-86 assembler is treated
as a public combination type.) MS-LINK does not automatically place memory-
combination types as the highest segments. Instead, MS-LINK generally places
segments in the .EXE file that it produces in the same order in which it found
the segments in the object modules.
The following items summarize how MS-LINK handles segments in private,
public, and common combinations. (MS-LINK treats stack combinations very
much like public combinations. Because a stack type theoretically has only one
segment, combination should not be necessary.)
Type Combination Procedure
Private Segments load separately, and stay separate. They can be
contiguous physically but not logically, even segments having the
same name. Each private segment has a base address.
Public Segments having the same segment and class names load contigu-
ously and have the same single base address. The offsets range
from the beginning of the first segment through the end of the
last segment. (Stack and memory types are treated like public
types, except the stack pointer is set to the highest address of
the last stack segment.)
Common Segments having the same segment name and class name are
loaded overlapping one another, and have the same single base
address. The length of the common area is the length of the
longest segment.

6-6 MS-LiNK Reference

The placement of segments in a group in the assembler lets items he addressed
from a single base address for all of the segments in that group.
DS:DGROUP XXXXOH o -- relative offset

B
-------FOO-
I C I

Any number of other segments can be placed between the segments in a group.
Thus, the offset of FOO can exceed the combined size of all of the segments in
the group (up to a total of 64 Kbytes). An operand of DGROUP:FOO returns
the offset of FOO from the beginning of the first segment of DGROUP (above,
Segment A).
Segments are grouped according to declared class names. MS-LINK loads all of
the segments that belong to the first class name it meets, and then loads all of
the segments that belong to the next class name it meets, and so on until it has
loaded all of the classes.
For example, if your assembly program contains the following segments, they will
be loaded in the indicated order:
A SEGMENT 'FOO' FOO
B SEGMENT 'BAZ' A
C SEGMENT 'BAZ' E

D SEGMENT 'ZOO' BAZ

E SEGMENT 'FOO' B C ZOO D

Note A, E, B, C and D are segment names; FOO, BAZ and ZOO are
classes.

If you are writing an assembly language program, you can control the ordering
of classes in memory by writing a dummy module and listing it first in response
to the MS-LINK Obj ect Modules prompt. In this dummy module, you should

MS-LiNK Reference 6-7

declare the segments according to classes in the order in which you want to load
the classes.

Caution Do not use this method with BASIC, COBOL, FORTRAN, or

PASCAL programs. Instead, let the compiler and the linker
perform their tasks in the normal way.

For example, consider the following module:

A SEGMENT 'CODE'
A ENDS

B SEGMENT 'CONST'
BENDS

C SEGMENT 'DATA'
C ENDS

D SEGMENT STACK 'STACK'

D ENDS

E SEGMENT 'MEMORY' (9)

E ENDS'

Be careful to declare in this module all of the classes to be used in your program.
Otherwise, you will lose full control over the ordering of the classes.
You can also use this method if you want to load one or more memory-combined
types as the last segments of your program. To do so, add MEMORY between
SEGMENT and 'MEMORY' in line (9) above.
It is important to understand that these segments will be loaded last only because
you specified this order, not because of any actions that are part of the linking
or assembly operations.

6-8 MS-LiNK Reference

Files that MS-LINK Uses
MS-LINK uses the following four types of files.

Type Description Filename Extension

Input files Object-code files .OBJ
Output files Executable RUN files .EXE
Listing files .MAP
VM.TMP file Temporary file .TMP
Library files Library, created earlier .LIB

MS-LINK works with one or more input files (which are the object modules), and
produces two output files. MS-LINK can also create a virtual memory file, and
can be instructed to search through from zero to eight library files.
You can specify each type of file, according to the following format:
[<d:>]<filename>[<.ext>]

In this specification,
• d: designates the drive the file is on.

• filename is a file name consisting of from 1 to 8 characters.

• . ext is a file name extension consisting of a period and from 1 to 3
characters.
Together, these make up the file name. The prompt does not require that you
specify the filename extension.
You can also enter a path nanle, as indicated below:
E:\BASIC\FNTOUCH.OBJ'

MS-LiNK Reference 6-9

Input Files
If an input file (object module) specification or a library file specification does not
contain a filename extension, then MS-LINK assumes the following extensions.
Type of File Default Extension
Object .OBJ
Library .LIB

Output Files
MS-LINK produces the following two types of output files:
• RUN files
• LIST files
MS- LINK appends to the nanles of these files the extensions listed below.
Type of File Default Extension
Run .EXE (cannot be changed by the user)
List . MAP (can be changed by the user)

6-10 MS-LiNK Reference

Virtual Memory File (VM. TMP File)
MS-LINK uses available memory during linking operations. If the files that
are to be joined create an output file that exceeds available memory, MS-LINK
automatically creates a temporary file and names it "VM. TMP" .
In such a case, MS-LINK displays the following message on the screen:
VM.TMP has been created
Do not change disc in drive <drv:>

If this message appears, do not remove the disc from the indicated drive until
linking operations are finished. Otherwise, MS-LINK can behave erratically, and
might return the following error message:
Unexpected end of file on VM.TMP

MS-LINK writes the contents of VM.TMP to the file name that you enter in
response to the "Run File:" prompt.
It is important to understand that VM. TMP is not a permanent working file.
MS-LINK deletes it when the linking session ends. Therefore, do not assign the
name "VM.TMP" to any file that you, the compiler, or the assembler creates.

Caution If a file that you have named VM. TMP is present on the disc
that is in the default drive, and if MS-LINK needs to create a
VM. TMP file, then MS- LINK will delete the existing VM. TMP
file and will create a new VM. TMP file. Any data in the first
VM. TMP file will be lost.

Running MS-LINK
To run MS- LINK, you must perform the following three actions:
• Enter a command to load and start MS- LINK.
• Enter filenames in response to the four MS-LINK prompts.
• Specify the settings of the optional switches that control other MS-LINK
features.

MS-LiNK Reference 6-11

Working With MS-LINK
You can run MS-LINK in anyone of the following three ways:
• By entering each filenalne from the keyboard in response to an individual
prompt.
• By entering all of the filenames on the same line on which you enter the
command that loads and starts MS- LINK.
• By entering the name of a separate Response File, containing the
necessary filenames, on the same line with the command that loads and
starts MS-LINK.
The syntax for each is shown below.
Way Syntax
Text Prompts LINK
Command-Line LINK <filename ... > [/ < switch ... >]
Response- File LINK @<file name>

6-12 MS-LiNK Reference

Using the Text-Prompt Method
Using this method, you load MS-LINK into memory by entering the following
command:
LINK

MS-LINK then displays four text prompts on the screen, one at a time. Your
responses to these prompts command MS-LINK to perform specific tasks.
These four prompts are discussed in detail in the section below entitled
"Command Prompts."
The optional switches are described III more detail In the section entitled
"Switches."

Using the Command-Line Method

To run MS- LINK using this method, you must enter a statement having the
following syntax:
LINK <object-list>, [<runfile>], [<listfile>], [<lib-list>] [/<switch> ... ]

The entries that follow the word LINK are your responses to the four prompts.
As indicated above, the entry fields for the different prompts must be separated
by a comma.
In this statement,
o bj ect-list is a list of object modules, separated by a plus-sign or a
space.
runfile is the name of the file that will receive the executable output.
listfile is the name of the file that will receive the listing.
lib-list is a list of the library Inodules to be searched, separated by
a blank space.
/switch is one or more optional switches, which you can specify after
any of the response entries (either directly before any of the
commas, or after <lib-list>, as shown above).

MS-UNK Reference 6-13

Note Only object-list is required; the other responses are optional. See
the section entitled "Command Prompts" for more information.

The following items list the default extensions that MS-LINK assumes if you do
not specify filename extensions in the first four items in the command line.
N arne of Response Field Default Filename Extension
<object-list> .OBJ
< runfile > .EXE
<listfile> .MAP
< lib-list> .LIB
To select the default extension for a response field, you need only enter a second
comma, not preceded by a space, after a first comma, as shown in the following
example:
LINK DEER+COMET+PRANCER+VIXEN/M/P .. DEERLIST.COBLIB.LIB

This statement loads MS-LINK, and then loads the following object modules:
DEER.OBJ
COMET.OBJ
PRANCER.OBJ
VIXEN.OBJ

MS-LINK then does the following things, in the order listed below:
• Links the object modules
• Searches the library file COBLIB.LIB
• Creates a list file named DEERLIST.MAP
• Produces a global symbol map (as instructed by the 1M switch)
• Pauses (as instructed by the IP switch)

6-14 MS-UNK Reference

Then, when you press any key, MS-LINK produces the default DEER.EXE run
file. MS-LINK chooses "DEER" for the default name because "DEER" is the
name of the first object file in the list. If a semicolon terminates an incomplete
command line, default values are assigned, and no prompts are given.

Using the Response-File Method

To call MS-LINK using this method, enter a statement having the following
syntax:

LINK @<file name>

In this statement,
@ is the character reserved by MS-LINK to indicate that the
filename that follows is a response file
file name is the name of a response file
A response file contains answers to the MS-LINK prompts, and can also specify
one or more of the switches. This method lets you conduct the MS-LINK session
without having to enter responses to the MS-LINK prompts one at a time.
However, before using this method to invoke MS- LINK, you must create the
Response File; if you do not do this, MS-LINK will display the following error
message:
"[<file name>]"
Cannot open response file.

When you use this method, MS-LINK displays each prompt in turn, followed by
the response( s) from the response file. If the response file does not contain one
or more answers to each prompt (in the form of either a filename, a command
character, or I Return I, MS-LINK will display the prompt for which a response is
missing, and will wait for you to enter a valid response from the keyboard. Once
you have done so, MS-LINK continues the linking session.

MS-LiNK Reference 6-15

Creating a Response File
You can use any text editor, such as EDLIN, or the MS-DOS COpy command
to create a response file. The file contains four text lines (one for each of the
MS-LINK prompts). The responses must appear in the same order in which the
command prompts appear, and must be separated from the previous response by
a carriage return. You can use I Return I alone on a line to pass over a prompt and
use the default value. If no default has been set for that prompt, LINK will wait
for you to enter an appropriate response from the "keyboard before continuing.
The following is an example of a response file:
DEER COMET PRANCER VIXEN
/PAUSE/MAP
DEERLIST
COBLIB.LIB
The first line of this response file tells MS-LINK to load the following four object
modules:
DEER.OBJ
COMET.OBJ
PRANCER.OBJ
VIXEN.OBJ

The second line instructs MS- LINK to pause (to let you swap discs) before
generating the .EXE file which defaults to DEER.EXE. (You may wish to review
the section below entitled "Switches" before using the /PAUSE switch. However,
in brief, this switch halts linking operations just before MS-LINK writes the .EXE
file. You must press the I Return I key to resume linking operations.)
In response to the third line, MS-LINK assigns the name DEERLIST .MAP to
the output files.
Last, as instructed in the fourth line, MS-LINK will search the library file
COBLIB.LIB.

6-16 MS-LiNK Reference

You can use the command characters "+" and ";" and the switches in a response
file the same way you use them in entries from the keyboard. See the sections
on "Command Characters" and "Optional Switches" for more information. The
following is an exam pIe of using command characters in a response file:
DEER+COMET+PRANCER+VIXEN
/PAUSE/MAP
DEERLIST;

Command Prompts
MS-LINK executes the commands that you enter in response to the following
four text prompts:
• Object Modules [.OBJ]
• Run File [First-Object-filename.EXE]
• List File [NUL.MAP]
• Libraries [.LIB]
After you enter a response to one prompt, the next prompt appears. After you
enter a response to the last prompt, MS-LINK automatically starts linking the
object files. At this point, you do not need to enter any further commands.
Once the link session has ended, MS-LINK returns control to MS-DOS. The re-
appearance of the MS-DOS prompt (for example, c: \» on the screen indicates
that the MS-LINK session was successful. If the link session did not end
successfully, the appropriate MS-LINK error message appears on the screen.
MS-LINK prompts you for the names of the object, run, and list files, and for
the name of the library file( s). If a prompt has a default response, that default
response appears in brackets after the prompt. (The "Object Modules:" prompt
is followed only by a default filename-extension response because this prompt has
no default filename response; instead, it requires that you enter a filename.)

MS-LiNK Reference 6-17

The following items show the four prompts and the corresponding actions that
you can take.
Prompt Response to be Made by User
Object Modules [.OBJ] Enter name(s) of .OBJ file(s) to be linked.
(Default: none. You must enter a response)
Run File [Object-file.EXE]: Enter filename for executable object code.
(Default: First-Object- filename.EXE)
List File [NUL. MAP] : Enter filename for output listing.
(Default: NUL filename; no list file will be
created)
Libraries [.LIB]: Enter names of files to be searched.
(Default: MS-LINK makes no search)
At the end of each response line, you can specify one or more optional switches.
Each switch must be preceded by a slash U). Switches are discussed in detail in
the section on "Optional Switches."

Object Modules [.OBJ]:

You must enter a list of the object modules to be linked. MS-LINK assumes that
the filename extension is .OBJ unless you specify a different extension in response
to this prompt.
Modules must be separated by a plus-sign (+) or a space.
Recall that MS-LINK loads segments into classes in the order in which it meets
them; this condition is useful when you are deciding on the order in which to
enter the object modules.

6-18 MS-LiNK Reference

Run File [First-Object-filename.EXE):
MS-LINK assigns the specified filename to the RUN (executable) file that it
creates to contain the results of the linking session. MS-LINK assigns the filename
extension ".EXE" to all RUN files, ignoring any other extension that you might
have specified.
If you do not enter a response to the Run File: prompt, then MS-LINK takes
the first filename entered in response to the Obj ect Modules: prompt and uses
it as the name of the RUN file. MS-LINK assumes that you want the .EXE file
placed in the current directory, even if your response to the Obj ect Modules:
prompt specifies another path or drive.

List File [NUL. MAP]:

Your response to this prompt instructs MS-LINK to generate a listing file that
contains an entry for each segment in the input (object) modules. Each of these
entries also shows the offset (addressing) in the RUN file.
A typical list file might look like this:
Start Stop Length Name Class
OOOOOH 0OO2CH 002DH CODE CODE
0002DH OOD74H OD48H XCODE MORECODE
00D75H OODA2H 002EH DSEG DATA
OODBOH OOFAFH 0200H STACK STACK
OOFBOH 010E5H 0136H VECTOR VECTORS

Origin Group
00D7:0 DGROUP
0000:0 PGROUP

If this prOInpt is passed over, the default NUL.MAP is specified, and MS-LINK
does not generate a listing file.

MS-LiNK Reference 6-19

Libraries [.LIB]:
A valid response to this prompt contains from one through eight library filenames,
or else I Return I alone to indicate that you do not want MS- LINK to search any
library files.
The library files must have been created beforehand by a library utility such as
the MS-DOS LIB utility (available with and documented in the Programmer's
Tools); or created as part of a pre-packaged library, such as the library available
with a high- level language. MS-LINK assumes that each library file has the
filename extension ".LIB".
Library filenames must be separated by a blank space or by a plus sign (+).
MS-LINK searches the library files, in the order in which the files were entered,
to resolve external references. When it finds the module that defines the external
symbol, MS-LINK processes that module as though it were another object
module.
If MS~ LINK cannot find the library file on the discs that are currently in the disc
drives, the following message appears on the screen:
Cannot find library <library-name>
Enter new drive letter:

In response, you need only type the letter designating the desired drive (for
example, "B"), without entering a colon after the letter, after inserting the disc
with the library file on it.
To find references, MS-LINK uses a method known as a "dictionary-indexed
library search." Under this approach, MS-LINK finds definitions for external
references via access to an index, instead of searching for each reference by
scanning a file sequentially from beginning to end. This method saves time during
a linking session that requires a library search.
When using object modules generated by a compiler, you should know that the
compiler may assume the existence of certain default library files. For example,
MS-COBOL (Version 1.10) assumes that the library files COBOL1.LIB and
COBOL2.LIB exist. In this case, if you are using MS-LINK to join COBOL
object (.OBJ) modules, you should enter the names of these library files.

6-20 MS-LiNK Reference

Command Characters
MS-LINK provides the following three command characters:
• The plus-sign (+)
• The semicolon (;)
• I CTRL ~@]
The Plus-Sign
You can use a plus-sign (+) to separate entries and to enter a series of items
in your response to the Obj ect Modules prompt and to the Libraries prompt.
(You can also use a blank space, or a mixture of blank spaces and plus-signs, to
separate object modules on the same line.)
To enter a series of responses that occupy more than one line (80 characters, less
the number of characters occupied by the prompt), enter a plus-sign followed by
I Return I at the end of the line. If the Plus-sign I Return I is the last entry in response
to the Obj ect Modules or Libraries prompt, then MS-LINK will display the
Obj ect Modules or Libraries prompt again, and you can continue to enter
responses.
When you have entered the names of all of the modules to be linked, be sure that
the response line ends with a module name and I Return ~not with a Plus-sign
I Return I.
For example, to use spaces and plus-signs to enter a set of modules named
SLEEPY, DOPEY, HAPPY, FRODO, and DOC, you can enter the following
responses in response to the Obj ect Modules prompt:
Object Modules [.OBJ]: SLEEPY DOPEY+I Return I
Object Modules [.OBJ]: HAPPY+FRODO+IReturnl
Object Modules [.OBJ]: DOC IReturn I

MS-LiNK Reference 6-21

The Semicolon
Any time after you respond to the Obj ect Modules prompt, you can use a single
semicolon (;) followed immediately by I Return I to select the default responses to
the remaining prompts. Entering this command saves time and avoids the need
to enter a series of I Return I keystrokes.
However, once you enter a semicolon, you cannot enter a response to any of the
remaining prompts in the current 1\18-LINK session. Therefore, do not use the
semicolon to skip over one or more prompts on your way to a prompt that you
do want to respond to; instead, use one or more I Return I keystrokes to do so.
For example, consider the prompts and responses shown below:
Object Modules [.OBJ]: SLEEPY GRUMPY JReturnl
Run Module [SLEEPY.EXE]: ; JReturnl

Because a semicolon appears directly before the I Return I in the response to the
Run Module prompt, none of the subsequent prompts will appear, and MS-LINK
will assume the default responses to them (including NUL.MAP for the listing
file) .

CTRL-C
To end an M8-LINK session at any time, press I CTRL I and @] simultaneously.
If you enter an incorrect response (such as an undesired or misspelled filename),
you must end the M8- LINK session by entering I CTRL ~@], and then begin a new
M8-LINK session.
Note that I CTRL HBreak I is equivalent to I CTRL ~@].
However, if you have typed an erroneous response but have not entered it (that
is, if the cursor is still on the line that contains the mistake), you can press the
8J key to delete each erroneous character, and then type a correct response.

6-22 MS-LiNK Reference

Optional Switches
The following items summarize the optional switch functions.
Switch Function
/DSALLOCATE Loads data at the high end of the data segment.
Required for PASCAL and FORTRAN programs.
/HIGH Places the RUN file as high as possible in memory.
Must not be used with PASCAL or FORTRAN
programs.
/LINENUMBERS Includes line numbers in the LIST file.
/MAP Lists all global symbols and their definitions in the
.MAP file.
/PAUSE Pauses the MS-LINK session; causes system to wait
until the user presses the I Return I key.
/STACK:<number> Sets a fixed stack size in the RUN file.

MS-LiNK Reference 6-23

You must specify optional switches at the end of a prompt response, regardless
of the method used to invoke MS-LINK. You can group the switch specifications
at the end of anyone response, or you can place them at the end of several
responses. If you include more than one switch at the end of one response, each
switch must be preceded by a slash (/).
For example:
Object Modules [.OBJ] : SNEEZY/DS/HI/STACK: 512

The switch specifications can be spelled out in whole, or can be truncated.

However, a truncation must consist of a sequential subset of the letters in
the specification, starting with the first letter. No letter( s) can be skipped
or transposed. The examples listed below show examples of legitimate and
unacceptable truncations for a switch specification; the /DSALLOCATE switch
has been used as a sample:
Valid Invalid
/D /DSL
/DS /DAL
/DSA /DL
/DSALLO /ALLOC
/DSALLOCA /DSALLOCT

6-24 MS-LiNK Reference

The /DSALLOCATE Switch
This switch instructs MS-LINK to load all data in the group (DGROUP) at the
high end of the group. (Otherwise, MS-LINK loads all data at the low end of the
group.)
At runtime, the DS pointer is set to the lowest possible address, thus letting
the entire data segment be used. If the /DSALLOCATE switch is used with
the /HIGH switch, the user application can dynamically allocate any available
memory located below the area specifically allocated within DGROUP. However,
this dynamically allocated memory can still be addressed by the same DS pointer.
Certain compilers need this type of dynamic allocation.

Note Your application program can dynamically allocate up to 64

Kbytes, less the amount allocated within DGROUP.

The /HIGH Switch

The /HIGH switch instructs MS-LINK to place the image of the RUN file as high
as possible in memory. Otherwise, lYfS- LINK places the image of the RUN file as
low as possible in memory. This action can cause the program to be written over
the transient portion of PAM or COMMAND. COM file. In such a case, MS-DOS
displays one of the following error message:
Insert COMMAND.COM in default drive
and strike any key when ready

or
Insert System Disc in A: and
strike any key to continue.

Note Do not use the /HIGH switch with PASCAL or FORTRAN

programs. They will not run.

MS-LiNK Reference 6-25

The /LiNENUMBERS Switch
The /LINENUMBERS switch instructs MS-LINK to include in the listing file
the line numbers and addresses of the source statements in the input modules.
(Otherwise, MS-LINK omits line numbers from the listing file.)
Not all compilers produce object modules that contain line-number information.
If the object module doesn't contain line-number information, then MS-LINK
cannot include it.

The /MAP Switch

The /MAP switch instructs MS-LINK to list all public (global) symbols defined
in the input modules. If you do not specify /MAP, then MS-LINK will list only
errors (including undefined global symbols), symbols, classes, and groups.
The MAP switch produces two lists: one in alphabetical order and one in value
order. The lists state the value of each symbol, and also gives its segment:offset
location in the RUN file.

6-26 MS-LiNK Reference

After MS-LINK locates and searches the speCified library file (s) (if told to do so),
it produces a map listing the segments in the order in which they appear in the
RUN (.EXE) output file. The next three tables show a typical linker map.

Start Stop Length Name

OOOOOH 009ECH 09EDH CODE

009FOH 01166H 0777H SYSINITSEG

Address Publics by Narne

009F:0012 BUFFERS

009F:0005 CURRENT _DOS_LOCATION

009F:OOll DEFAULT _DRIVE

009F:OOOB DEVICE_LIST

009F:0013 FINAL_DOS_LOCATION

009F:OOOF MEMORY _SIZE

009F:OOOO SYSINIT

Address Publics by Value

009F:OOOO
SYSINIT
009F:0005 CURRENT _DOS_LOCATION

009F:0009 FIN AL_DOS_LOCATION

009F:OOOB DEVICE_LIST

009F:OOOF MEMORY _SIZE

009F:OOll DEFAULT _DRIVE

009F:0012 BUFFERS

MS-LiNK Reference 6-27

In part (a) of this example, the "Start" and "Stop" columns do not contain the
absolute addresses where these segments are loaded. Instead, they contain the
20-bit hex address of each segnlent relative to the beginning of the load module.
(This point is known as "location zero.")
In part (b) of this example, MS-LINK lists the public symbols: first alphabetically
by name, and then by value.

The /PAUSE Switch

The /PAUSE switch causes MS-LINK to pause the linking operations until you
press the I Return I key. (Otherwise, MS- LINK runs through the linking session non-
stop from beginning to end.) The pause lets you change discs before MS-LINK
outputs the RUN (.EXE) file.
When MS-LINK encounters the /PAUSE switch, it displays the following
message:
About to generate .EXE file
Change disc press Enter

However, do not remove a disc that is to receive the List file, or a disc that
contains the VM. TMP file (that is, if MS-LINK created a VM. TMP file).

The /STACK:<number> Switch

In this specification, <number> represents any positive integral numerical value
(expressed in decimal notation) up to 65 536 bytes. If you specify a value from 1
through 511, then MS-LINK uses 512. If you do not specify the /STACK switch,
then MS-LINK IQoks for stack size information in the .OBJ files.
All compilers and assemblers should provide information in the object modules
that lets MS-LINK compute the required stack size. At least one object module
must contain a stack-allocation statement. Otherwise, MS-LINK will display the
following error lnessage:
Warning: No Stack Statement

6-28 MS-LiNK Reference

MS-LINK Examples
The following examples denl0nstrate the use of the MS-LINK Utility.

Example 1
This example demonstrates the linking of object modules from several discs and
several directories, and the use of the "+" command character to enter a series
of responses to the Object Modules prompt. Note, too, the use of the semicolon
(;) to select default filenames for the Run File and List File, and to pass over the
Library search.
B>link
Microsoft 8086 Object Linker
Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985
Object Modules [.OBJ]: MAIN+SECOND+BIGFILE+
Object Modules [.OBJ]: E:\BASIC\FNTOUCH+
Object Modules [.OBJ]: C:CHAR
Run File [MAIN.EXE]: ;

B>

Example 2
In this example, the user has supplied the name of the Runfile as RUN _FILE.
Otherwise, the Linker would have used the name of the first Object Module and
named the Run File MAIN.EXE. Note use of the semicolon to skip over the
remaining prompts.
B>LINK
Microsoft 8086 Object Linker
Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985

Object Modules [.OBJ]: MAIN+SECOND

Run File [MAIN.EXE]: RUN_FILE;

B>

MS-LiNK Reference 6-29

Example 3
In the third example, the user specified a List File name, then used the MS-DOS
TYPE command to view its contents. Note use of the semicolon to skip over the
remaining prompts.
B>LINK
Microsoft 8086 Object Linker
Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985

Object Modules [.OBJ]: MAIN SECOND BIGFILE

Run File [MAIN.EXE]:
List File [NUL.MAP]: MAIN;

B>TYPE MAIN.MAP

Start Stop Length Name Class

OOOOOH 0002CH 002DH CODE CODE
0002DH 00D74H OD48H XCODE MORE_CODE
00D75H 00DA2H 002EH DSEG DATA
OODBOH OOFAFH 0200H STACK STACK
OOFBOH 010E5H 0136H VECTOR VECTORS

Origin Group
0007:0 DGROUP
0000:0 PGROUP

B>

6-30 MS-LiNK Reference

Example 4
Here, the user specified one Object File, skipped over the Run File and List File
prompts causing default file names to be used, and specified a Library Search by
entering a file name in response to the Libraries prompt.
B>LINK
Microsoft 8086 Object Linker
Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985

Object Modules [.OBJ]: MAIN

Run File [MAIN.EXE]:
List File [NUL.MAP]:
Libraries [.LIB]: LIBRARY

B>

Example 5
Example 5 is the same as Example 1, except that the user has placed all entries
specifying Object Modules on the command line (the Command-Line Method),
separated with the "+" command character:
B>LINK MAIN+SECOND+BIGFILE+E:\BASIC\FNTOUCH+C:CHAR;
Microsoft 8086 Object Linker
Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985

B>

MS-UNK Reference 6-31

Example 6
This example achieves the same result as in Example 3, but the user has placed all
instructions on the comnland line rather than responding to individual prompts:
B>LINK MAIN SECOND BIGFILE, ,MAIN;

Microsoft 8086 Object Linker

Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985

B>TYPE MAIN.MAP

Start Stop Length Name Class

OOOOOH 0002CH 002DH CODE CODE
0002DH 00D74H OD48H XC ODE MORE_CODE
00D75H 00DA2H 002EH DSEG DATA
OODBOH OOFAFH 0200H STACK STACK
OOFBOH 010E5H 0136H VECTOR VECTORS

Origin Group
00D7:0 DGROUP
0000:0 PGROUP

B>

Note the following:

• One comma followed by a second comma was used to skip the Run File
prompt .
• The semicolon was used to skip the Library prompt so that the no library
search was made.
Finally, the user used the MS-DOS TYPE command to view the contents of the
List file MAIN. MAP.

6-32 MS-LINK Reference

Example 7
In the example that follows, the user has created a response file named
LINKOBJS and used the MS-DOS TYPE command to view the contents. The
command to call and run MS-LINK is followed by
LINK COLINKOBJS

enabling the response file to respond to the four prompts.

B>TYPE LINKOBJS
MAIN+SECOND+BIGFILE+
E:\BASIC\FNTOUCH+C:CHAR

B>LINK COLINKOBJS

Microsoft 8086 Object Linker

Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985

Object Modules [.OBJ]: MAIN+SECOND+BIGFILE+

Object Modules [.OBJ]: E:\BASIC\FNTOUCH+
Object Modules [.OBJ]: C:CHAR
Run File [MAIN.EXE];

B>

If the Linking session had not been successful, error messages would have been
displayed before control was returned to MS-DOS.

MS-LiNK Reference 6-33

Example 8
The response file lllethod is again used. The Linker was unable to locate the
Object Module LONGFILENAME.OBJ and prompted to user to change discs;
the user terminated the session with the I CTRL ~@] command character.
B>TYPE INVALID
LONGFILENAME
LONG

B>LINK COINVALID

Microsoft 8086 Object Linker

Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983. 1984. 1985

Object Modules [.OBJ]: LONGFILENAME

Run File [LONGFILENAME.EXE]: LONG
List File [NUL.MAP]:
Libraries [.LIB]:
Cannot find file LONGFILENAME.OBJ
change diskette <hit ENTER> -C

B>

Example 9
In this example, the user failed to specify a Library File and the Link session
paused. The user entered the library file so the session could continue.
B>TYPE THREE. PAR
main second bigfile
mainprog
mainmap

B>link COthree.par
Microsoft 8086 Object Linker
Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983. 1984. 1985

Object Modules [.OBJ]: MAIN SECOND BIGFILE

Run File [MAIN.EXE]: MAINPROG
List File [NUL.MAP]: MAINMAP
Libraries [.LIB]: library

B>

6-34 MS-LiNK Reference

Example 10
The following lines of code illustrate the use and non-use of the IDS switch. In
the first part of the sample code, the IDS switch is used causing data to be placed
in high memory. In the second part, the switch is not used, and data is placed
in low memory.
B>LINK
Microsoft 8086 Object Linker
Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983. 1984. 1985

Object Modules [.OBJ]: SAMPLE/DS

Run File [SAMPLE. EXE] :
List File [NUL.MAP]: CON;

Start Stop Length Name Class

OOOOOH 00012H 0013H YCODE CODE
00020H 0003AH 001BH CODE CODE
0003BH 00051H 0017H DSEG DATA
00052H OOD99H OD48H XC ODE MORE_CODE
OODAOH 00ED5H 0136H VECTOR VECTORS
OOEEOH 010DFH 0200H STACK_SE STACK

Origin Group
FOEE:O DGROUP
0002:0 PGROUP

Program entry pOint at 0002:0000

B>LINK
Microsoft 8086 Object Linker
Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983. 1984. 1985

Object Modules [.OBJ]: SAMPLE

Run File [SAMPLE. EXE]:
List File [NUL. MAP] : CON;

Start Stop Length Name Class

OOOOOH 00012H 0013H YCODE CODE
00020H 0003AH 001BH CODE CODE
0003BH 00051H 0017H DSEG DATA
00052H 00D99H OD48H XCODE MORE_CODE
OODAOH 00ED5H 0136H VECTOR VECTORS
OOEEOH 010DFH 0200H STACK_SEG STACK

MS-LINK Reference 6-35

 Origin Group
0003:0 DGROUP
0002:0 PGROUP

Program entry pOint at 0002:0000

Example 11
Because the /HIGH switch was used in this example, COMMAND. COM was
overwritten in memory. The Operating System notified the user with an error
message instructing him to insert the disc with the COMMAND. COM file and
start again. In the second try, the user omitted the /HIGH switch and the Linking
session was successful.
B>LINK SAMPLE,A:SAMPLE/HIGH;

Microsoft 8086 Object Linker

Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985

B>A:

A>SAMPLE Simple linker example

Insert COMMAND.COM disk in default drive and

strike any key when ready

A>B:

B>LINK SAMPLE,A:SAMPLE;

Microsoft 8086 Object Linker

Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983, 1984, 1985

B>A:
A>SAMPLE Simple linker example

A>B:

B>

6~36 MS-LiNK Reference

Example 12
This example demonstrates use of the /PAUSE Switch.
B>LINK SAMPLE/P;

Microsoft 8086 Object Linker

Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983. 1984. 1985

About to generate .EXE file

Change disks <hit ENTER> I Return I

B>

MS-UNK Reference 6-37

Example 13
In this final example, use of the /STACK switch is shown. In the first part of
the sample code, the Stack size is specified as 1024 bytes; in the second part of
the sample code, the Stack size defaults to 512 bytes.
B>LINK SAMPLE/STACK:1024 .. CON;

Microsoft 8086 Object Linker

Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983. 1984. 1985

Start Stop Length Name Class

OOOOOH 00012H 0013H YCoDE CODE
00020H 0003AH 001BH CODE CODE
0003BH 00051H 0017H DSEG DATA
00052H 00D99H OD48H XC ODE MORE_CODE
OODAOH 00ED5H 0136H VECTOR VECTORS
OOEEOH 012DFH 0400H STACK_SEG STACK

Origin Group
0003:0 DGROUP
0002:0 PGROUP

Program entry point at 0002:0000

B>LINK SAMPLE .. CON;

Microsoft 8086 Object Linker

Version 3.00 (C) Copyright Microsoft Corp 1983. 1984. 1985

Start Stop Length Name Class

OOOOOH 00012H 0013H YCoDE CODE
00020H 0003AH 001BH CODE CODE
0003BH 00051H 0017H DSEG DATA
00052H 00D99H OD48H XCoDE MORE_CODE
OODAOH 00ED5H 0136H VECTOR VECTORS
OOEEOH 010DFH 0200H STACK_SEG STACK

Origin Group
0003:0 DGROUP
0002:0 PGROUP

Program entry point at 0002:0000

B>

6-38 MS-LiNK Reference

Error Messages
If an error occurs during an MS-LINK linking session, the linker reports the error
and attempts to continue the linking session. Therefore, after you determine
the cause and correct the erroneous condition, you must restart MS-LINK and
conduct the linking session again.
The MS-LINK error messages are listed below, along with explanations and
solutions or suggested actions.
MESSAGE: ATTEMPT TO ACCESS DATA OUTSIDE OF SEGMENT
BOUNDS, POSSIBLY BAD OBJECT MODULE
Cause: An object file is deficient somehow.
Remedy: Recompile object modules.
MESSAGE: BAD NUMERIC PARAMETER
Cause: A numerical value is not expressed in digits.
Remedy: Express the numerical value in digits.
MESSAGE: CANNOT OPEN TEMPORARY FILE
Cause: MS-LINK cannot create the VM.TMP virtual-memory file
because the disc directory is full.
Remedy: Insert a new disc. However, do not change the disc that is
to receive the LIST.MAP file; in this case, restart LINK.
MESSAGE: ERROR: DUP RECORD TOO COMPLEX
Cause: The DUP record in an assembly-language module is too
complex.
Remedy: Simplify DUP record in assembly language program.
MESSAGE: ERROR: FIXUP OFFSET EXCEEDS FIELD WIDTH
Cause: An assembly-language instruction refers to an address with
a short instruction instead of with a long module.
Remedy: Edit the assembly-language source and re-assenlble the
instruction.

MS-UNK Reference 6-39

MESSAGE: INPUT FILE READ ERROR
Cause: An object file is deficient somehow.
Remedy: RecOlnpile the file and try again.
MESSAGE: INVALID OBJECT MODULE
Cause: One or more object Inodules were ilnproperly formed, or
were incomplete (for example, as would be the case if
assembly were stopped in mid-process).
Remedy: Re-compile the object module(s).
MESSAGE: PROGRAM SIZE OR NUMBER OF SEGMENTS EXCEEDS
CAPACITY OF LINKER
Cause: The aggregate size of all of the files, once linked, cannot
exceed 384 Kbytes; the total nunlber of segments cannot
exceed 255.
Remedy: Review the size of the files and the number of segments;
reduce the aggregate size by combining segments.
MESSAGE: REQUESTED STACK SIZE EXCEEDS 64K
Cause: A stack size greater than 64 Kbytes was requested.
Remedy: Use the /STACK switch to specify a stack size that is equal
to or less than 64 Kbytes.
MESSAGE: SEGMENT SIZE EXCEEDS 64K
Cause: 64 Kbytes is the upper limits of the addressing system.
Remedy: Reduce segment size by splitting it into two or more
segments.
MESSAGE: SYMBOL DEFINED MORE THAN ONCE
Cause: MS-LINK found two or more modules that define a single
symbol name.
Remedy: Remove the definition or change the name in one of the
conflicting nlodules. You should be aware that some
languages use only the first eight characters in a symbol
name.

6-40 MS-LiNK Reference

MESSAGE: SYMBOL TABLE CAPACITY EXCEEDED
Cause: Many long names were entered (occupying approximately
25 Kbytes).
Remedy: Review the number and length of the names entered in the
symbol table and shorten names.

MESSAGE: TOO MANY EXTERNAL SYMBOLS IN ONE MODULE

Cause: The upper limit on external symbols per module is 256.
Remedy: Reduce the number of external symbols per module by
eliminating names or by splitting one or more modules.
MESSAGE: TOO MANY GROUPS
Cause: The upper limit on groups is 10.
Remedy: Recommended Action: Declare fewer groups.
MESSAGE: TOO MANY LIBRARIES SPECIFIED
Cause: The upper limit on library files is 8.
Remedy: Reduce the number of library files specified in response
to the "Libraries" prompt. Use the Microsoft LIB Utility
available and documented in the Programmer's Tools, to
combine libraries, and/or remove unnecessary routines.
MESSAGE: TOO MANY PUBLIC SYMBOLS
Cause: The upper limit on public symbols is 1024.
Remedy: Declare fewer public symbols.
MESSAGE: TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR CLASSES
Cause: The upper limit on segments and classes (considered to-
gether) is 256.
Remedy: Declare fewer segments or classes.

MS-LiNK Reference 6-41

MESSAGE: UNRESOLVED EXTERNALS: <list>
Cause: MS-LINK found no defining module among the modules or
library files specified.
Remedy: Include the necessary definition module among the specified
modules or library files by placing file name after Object
Module or Library prompt.

MESSAGE: VM READ ERROR

Cause: A disc problem, not caused by MS-LINK.
Remedy: Check your system.
MESSAGE: WARNING: NO STACK SEGMENT
Cause: None of the object modules specified contains a statement
allocating stack space.
Remedy: Review the object modules; at least one object module
should contain a stack-allocation statement.
MESSAGE: WARNING: SEGMENT OF ABSOLUTE OR UNKNOWN TYPE
Cause: An object module is bad, or an improper module was loaded
for linking (i.e., a module MS-LINK cannot handle, such as
an absolute object module).
Remedy: Verify the type of module and/or segment loaded.
MESSAGE: WRITE ERROR IN TMP FILE
Cause: No more disc space remains into which the VM. TMP file
can expand.
Remedy: Free some disc space by moving or deleting files.
MESSAGE: WRITE ERROR ON RUN FILE
Cause: The remaining disc space is too small for the RUN file.
Remedy: Free some disc space by moving or deleting files.

6-42 MS-LINK Reference

 A
DOS Message Directory
MS-DOS messages (called DOS hereafter) are issued when DOS or a DOS
command encounters an error, needs to inform the user of system status, or
prompt the user for an action.
A DOS command or the resident portion of DOS can generate an error message.
The resident portion generates a message only when a disk or device encounters
an error condition.
The following section named "Disk and Device Errors" discusses messages the
resident portion can generate. A final section named "DOS Command Messages"
lists messages generated by commands in alphabetical order. After each message,
you see a table that has the following parts:
Command: Lists the command, or commands, that can generate the error
message.
Cause: Describes the condition or conditions in the system that
causes the error.
Action: Explains the actions you take to remove the error condition,
or notes that no action is required.

DOS Message Directory A-1

Disc and Device Errors
If a disk or device error occurs at any time during a command or program, DOS
displays an error message in the following format:
<type><action> drive <x>
Abort,Ignore,Retry:

The error conditions for <type> can be one of the following:

Bad call format error
Bad command error
Bad unit error
Data error
FeB unavailable
General failure
Lock violation
Invalid disk change
No paper error
Non-DOS disk error
Not ready error
Read fault error
Sector not found error
Seek error
Sharing violation
Write fault error
Write protect error

The <action> can be reading or writing. The drive designator indicates the drive
in which the error occurred. For example, attempting to write to a disk in drive
A that had a write-protect tab produces the following error message:
Write protect error writing drive A
Abort, Retry, Ignore?

A-2 DOS Message Directory

DOS waits for you to respond in one of the following ways:
A - Abort End the program requesting the disk read or write.
I - Ignore Ignore the error condition and proceed with the program.
R - Retry Repeat the operation. Use this response when you have
corrected the error.
Besides the error conditions mentioned above for disks and devices 1 the resident
portion can display the following error message:
FILE ALLOCATION TABLE BAD FOR DRIVE x

The copy in memory of one of the allocation tables has error. Run CHKDSK
with the IF option, and if the error persists, the disk is unusable. Reformat it
before using it again.

DOS Command Messages

This section contains the error messages a DOS command can display. Look for
your message in the alphabetical list. The table following the message describes
the situation.

Abort Edit (YIN)?

Command: EDLIN
Cause: You entered a Q session without saving any editing
changes.
Action: Enter Y to exit without saving the editing changes to disk.
Enter N to cancel the command and continue the editing
session. Use E to exit EDLIN and save editing changes.

DOS Message Directory A-3

Abort, Retry, Ignore?

Command: DOS

Cause: A disk or disk device error has been detected by DOS

during a program or command's execution.
Action: Enter A to abort the program, R to have DOS attempt
the operation again, or I to proceed with the program or
command. The I option is not recommended.

ABORTED - Assigned Port Number missing or invalid

Command: MODE
Cause: You specified printer redirection and the specified serial
port is not present in the system, or you specified a port
other than COM! or COM2.
Action: Re-enter command line.

ABORTED - Bad device parameter keyword

Command: MODE
Cause: You specified a device other than LPTn or COMn. MODE
only affects the parallel ports, serial ports, and screen.
Action: Re-enter command line.

ABORTED - Illegal BUSY value

Command: MODE
Cause: You specified something other than P to initialize a port as
the printer device.
Action: Re-enter command line.

A-4 DOS Message Directory

ABORTED - Illegal STOPBITS value

Command: MODE
Cause: You specified a value other than 1 or 2 for the number of
stop bits.
Action: Re-enter command line.

ABORTED - Illegal DATABITS value

Command: MODE
Cause: You specified a value other than 7 or 8 for the number of
data bits.
Action: Re-enter command line.

ABORTED - Invalid Switch

Command: MODE
Cause: An invalid parameter was given in the command line.
Action: Re-enter command line.

Active code page not available from CON device

Command: KEYB
Cause: There is no currently loaded CON code page, or the
DEVICE=DISPLAY.SYS directive was not given in
CONFIG.SYS.
Action: For CON, prepare and select a code page, or set the
directive in CONFIG.SYS. Then, restart DOS.

DOS Message Directory A-S

Allocation error for file, size adjusted

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The file has an invalid sector. number. The problem exists
in the FAT, not in the file. CHKDSK truncates the file at
the end of the last valid sector.
Action: If rerunning CHKDSK does not fix the problem, you
can restore the backup copy of the file (be aware that
RESTORE has some limitations).

Allocation error, size adjusted

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The size of the indicated file is inconsistent with the
amount of data allocated to the file.
Action: If you specified IF, the file is truncated at the end of the
last valid cluster. If you did not specify IF, the message is
just information. CHKDSK takes no action, so you should
re-run the command with IF.

Are you sure (Y /N)?

Command: DEL,ERASE
Cause: Appears when you instruct DOS to delete all of the files in
a directory.
Action: Enter Y to proceed, N to abort the command.

APPEND/ASSIGN Conflict

Command: APPEND
Cause: You tried to use APPEND after running ASSIGN.
Action: Cancel the ASSIGN, execute APPEND, and then execute
ASSIGN again.

A-6 DOS Message Directory

Bad command or file name

Command: DOS

Cause: DOS is unahl(' to find the program or command just

entered.
Action: Re-enter the command line with the correct spelling of
the program or command move a copy of the program
1

or command file into an accessible directory, change the

current directory to one that contains the file, or issue a
PATH command to instruct DOS where to look for the
command.

Bad file number

Command: FC

Cause: Fe finds a defect in one of the files sp('cified.

Action: Run CHKDSK to verify the integrity of your disk.

Bad or miSSing (filename)

Command: DOS
Cause: DOS can't find the file containing the device drivrr (wlwn'
its specified in the file CONFIG.SYS) in the root dirrctory
of the boot disk, or an error is detected in the driver as its
being loaded. The name of driver (filename) is display()d in
the error message. In either case, the device driver is not
incorporated into DOS.
Action: Check the spelling of the filename in CONFIG.SYS or copy
the file containing the device driver into the root dirrctory
of the boot disk.

DOS Message Directory A-7

Bad or missing Command Interpreter

Command: DOS
Cause: DOS cannot find the file COMMAND. COM (or the file
containing the alternate command processor specified
in the CONFIG.SYS file using the SHELL command)
in the root directory of the boot disk or if an error was
encountered as the file was being loaded.
Action: Copy the file containing the command processor into the
root directory of the boot disk or check the spelling of the
SHELL filename in the CONFIG.SYS file.

Bad or missing Keyboard Definition File

Command: KEYB
Cause: KEYBOARD .SYS is corrupted, or KEYB could not find
the file.
Action: Try again, making sure you specify the drive and path to
the file. If you get the message again, the file is corrupt.
Fix the file according to directions given in your user's
guide for editing KEYBOARD.SYS.

Buffer size adjusted

Command: VDISK (a directive in CONFIG.SYS)

Cause: It is necessary to adjust the buffer size specified in the
DEVICE=VDISK.SYS command in the CONFIG.SYS file.
Action: Edit CONFIG.SYS as required to make the buffer work.

A-a DOS Message Directory

Canceled by operator

Command: PRINT
Cause: You specified the IT switch in the PRINT command.
Action: Thy the command again without the switch.

Cannot CHOIR to (path) - tree past this point not processed

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The command cannot reach the specified subdirectory. All
subdirectories beneath this directory will not be verified.
Action: No action required.

Cannot CHOIR to root. Processing cannot continue

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The command cannot return to the root directory while it
is verifying the tree directory structure. CHKDSK cannot
continue checking the subdirectories in the root.
Action: No action required.

Cannot CHKOSK a Network drive

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: A drive has been specified that is redirected over the
network. CHKDSK can only operate on local disk drives.
Action: Do not specify a disk drive that is not local.

DOS Message Directory A-9

Cannot do binary reads from a device

Command: COpy

Cause: An attempt was made to copy a file from a device and the
IB option was specified. This mode is invalid due to the
fact that COpy needs to be able to detect the end-of-file
character from the device.
Action: Re-enter the command line and omit the IB option
or specify the I A option after the device name in the
command line.

Cannot edit BAK file-rename file

Command: EDLIN
Cause: The filename specified to edit has an extension of .BAK.

Action: Rename the file giving it a different extension, or copy the

file to a new file with an extension other than BAK.

Cannot FORMAT nonremovable drive d:

Command: BACKUP
Cause: You used BACKUP with IF and the destination disk is a
hard disk.
Action: Try again without the switch, or use flexible disks for the
backup.

Cannot format an ASSIGNed or SUBSTed drive

Command: FORMAT

Cause: A drive with an active assignment was specified as the

target drive.
Action: Use an ASSIGN command to clear the assignment and re-
enter the FORMAT command.

A-10 DOS Message Directory

Cannot FORMAT a Network drive

Comma,nd: FORMAT
Canse: A drive was specified that is redirected over the network.

Action: Do not specify a non-local drive.

Cannot recover . entry, processing continued

Command: CHKDSK

Cause: The active directory (indicated by the single period) is

d('f('ctiv('.
Action: No action required.

Cannot RECOVER a Network drive

Command: RECOVER
Cans(': A drive has been specified that is redirected over the
nrtwork.
Adion: Do not specify a drive that is not local.

DOS Message Directory A-11

Cannot recover directory
entry, processing continued

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: CHKDSK cannot recover directory (the current or parent
directory) in directoryname (the directory having damage).
Action: Copy files from the directory as possible, erase the files
in the subdirectory, and remove the subdirectory. Then,
restore the files from your backup (See RESTORE and
BACKUP before you do anything.).

Cannot recover .. entry

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The parent directory (indicated by the dual periods) is
defective.
Action: No action required.

Cannot use FASTOPEN for drive d:

Command: FASTOPEN
Cause: You used FASTOPEN on a drive affected by an ASSIGN,
JOIN, or SUBST.
Action: Undo the effects of the appropriate command, and try
again.

A-12 DOS Message Directory

CHOIR .. failed trying alternate method

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: CHKDSK became confused and could not get to a parent
directory.
Action: Restart DOS and rerun CHKDSK. If the command still
fails, the disk has a serious flaw. Retire a flexible disk. Try
to reformat a hard disk.

Codepage not prepared

Command: MODE
Cause: For MODE /STATUS, a space is available, but no code
page exists for the space. For a MODE SELECT, the
selected code page is not prepared. On using MODE for
the console device named CON:, the selected code page
might not have the font for the current video mode.
Action: To solve this problem, use MODE with PREPARE to
reload the appropriate code page and re-execute MODE
with SELECT. On getting the error again, edit the
DEVICE=DISPLAY.SYS line, increasing the value of
sub/onts. Then, restart DOS.

DOS Message Directory A-13

Codepage operation not supported on this device

Command: MODE

Cause: On {)x('cntillg MODE wit II ('it il(']' PREPAH E or ~ELE('T.

onr of the followillg t hil1gs happelled. You:
1. f'utf'red all ilJ('oITtTt device;
2. mi~spell{'d devicenarne;
3. Plltered a 1l0lH'xistillg devic{' nClllH';
4. cnt ('red a d('vicc mUll() not having all appropriat<'
dcvic() driv('l" (DISPLA. Y .S\TS for the rOllsol('.
PIUNTER.SYS for tIl(' prillU'r);
5. entered the device driv{'r din'ct.iv{' ilH'OlT('ct ly: or
6. nalIlrd a devicc that callIlot switch code pag<':--.

Action: To solv(' t he problem:

1. Check the devi('(' llalllC sp('('ifird with tIl(' :\,10DE

cOlIllllalld.
2. If tIl(' device Hame is COlT('cL check t11(' phrasi!ig
for tll(' devic(' oriv('l' ill CONFIG.SYS. Tbis i;-; 111(\:
a. DISPLAY .SYS lim' WlH'1l t 11(' prubl('lll is ill
the CON d{'vic('.
h. PRINTEILSYS line whell the probl('lll is
in the LPTx or PHN devic{'s.
3. (;heck for specifyillg the appropriate lllllllbn for
LPT for your prillt.<'l".
If you change CONFIG.SYS. restart DOS alld try tlH'
MODE comIlland again.

A-14 DOS Message Directory

Code pages cannot be prepared

Command: MODE

Action: You used MODE with PREPARE and either:

1. specifi('d more code pages than the device driver
allows; or
2. duplicated a code page for the Quietwriter III
printer.
Mode does not prepare code pages. It deletes previously
prepared code pages having the same position as the code
pages in your command.
Action: Th(' Quietwriter III cannot duplicate a hardware code
page. For other devices, use MODE with /STATUS to
check the allowed number of prepared code pages. To have
more code pages than those listed in the prepared code
page lines, edit added_codepages in the DISPLAY.SYS or
PRINTER.SYS lines in CONFIG.SYS. Restart DOS and
try the command again.

Code page requested (codepage) is not valid

for given keyboard code

Command: KEYB

Cause: You specified a keyboard code, but not a code page.

Action: Try again, specifying a compatible key code and code page.

DOS Message Directory A-15

Code page specified is inconsistent with the
selected code page

Command: KEYB
Cause: You specified a key code and code page, but a different
code page is active for CON (the console).
Action: Run KEYB to see the current situation. Then, use the
MODE CON CODEPAGE SELECT command to activate
the appropriate code page.

Code page specified has not been prepared

Command: KEYB
Cause: Your CONFIG.SYS file has a DEVICE=DISPLAY.SYS
directive, but the keyboard code used with KEYB needs a
code page that is not yet prepared.
Action: Run KEYB without parameters to see the current
situation. Then, use a MODE CON CODEPAGE
PREPARE command to prepare the code page for the
keyboard code you want to use.

Compare error on side x, track y

Command: DISKCOMP
Cause: One or more locations on the indicated side and track of
the two disks contain differing information.
Action: You may not need to do anything. The differences may be
due to previously copying files. Commands and programs
may work fine and merely be stored on differing locations.
Running CHKDSK can indicate if one or both disks
contain bad locations.

A-16 DOS Message Directory

COMy bbb,p,d,s,t initialized

Command: MODE
Cause: Your command initialized the asynchronous
communications adapter: y is the adapter number; bbbb
is the baud rate; p is the parity; d is the number of data
bits; s is the number of stop bits; and t is the retry on a
time-out.
Action: None required

Contains invalid cluster, file truncated

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The FAT has a bad pointer to filename.
Action: If you did not use IF, rerun CHKDSK with this option.

Contains xxx noncontiguous blocks

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: A disk has filename stored in xxx noncontiguous pieces.
This is not serious, but it slows performance.
Action: For a flexible disk, copy the files to another flexible disk. If
many files have this condition on a hard disk, backup the
disk, reformat the disk, and then restore the files.

DOS Message Directory A-17

Content of destination lost before copy

Command: COpy
Cause: The same file has been specified as both a source and
the destination drive. The following command shows an
example:
COPY FILEl +FILE2 FILEl
FILEi is overwritten before it can be copied.

Action: Copy to a temporary file. delete the duplicate file, and

f('IlanW the temporary file to the desired filename.

Convert directory to file (YIN)?

COHUllctnd: (;JIKDSK

Cause: A directory contains so much bad information, it cannot be

used as a directory.
Actioll: Answer with N 011 first seeing the question so CHKDSK
will take no action. Later: you can copy files from the
directory to another disk and see if you can use the files.
TIH'I1, rerun CHKDSK to COIlvert the directory into a file
awl try to recover the rest of the files.

Convert lost chains to files (YIN)?

Command: CHKDSK

Cause: The command detected lost clusters or chains (multiple

clusters).
Action: If you answer Y. each chain will })(' (,(Hlvert ed to a file
with FILEnnnn. C'HK. where nnnn is a sequentialmHnber
starting with 0000. If YOlt allswer N. CHKDSK frees
t 11<' lost cliaills. and thpir space lllay 1H' reallocated by
DOS. Thn,e actions ollly occur if the /1" option has been
specified. If not. CHKDSK will ask the question, but no
action will be taken.

A-18 DOS Message Directory

Copy Another (YIN)?

Command: DISKCOPY

Cause: The command completed copying a disk.

Action: Answer Y to copy another disk, N to abort the command.

Copy Process Ended

Command: DISKCOPY

Cause: You tried to copy disks of differing densities.

Action: Copy disks of similar densities.

Corrections will not be written to disk

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: An error(s) has been detected on the disk, but the IF
option was been specified.
Action: Run CHKDSK again with the IF option.

Current keyboard does not support this Codepage

Command: MODE
Cause: You executed KEYB previously to executing MODE with
SELECT. A conflict now exists between the current code
page for the keyboard and the code page specified by
MODE for the console. The code page for the console goes
to the specified code page, but the keyboard code page is
unchanged.
Action: To use the new code page on the console, execute KEYB
with an appropriate keyboard code because executing
KEYB automatically switches the keyboard's code page.

DOS Message Directory A-19

Device error during Xxxxxx

Command: MODE
Causes: The error occurs during a MODE with CODEPAGE.
Xxxxxx can be: Prepare, Refresh, Select, Status, or write of
font file to device. The error could be due to the following
things:
• The device does not support code page switching.
• CONFIG.SYS has no line for including a device
driver.
• The value of added_ codepages does not allow more
code pages.
• The code page information file is corrupted or
nonexistent.
• MODE with PREPARE had no name for the file
for the code page.
• The code page number was incorrect.
• The device detected a transmission error.
• The device is turned off or not selected.
• You ran MODE REFRESH ahead of MODE
SELECT or CHCP.
Action: Try the following before running MODE CODEPAGE:
1. Use MODE SELECT instead of MODE
REFRESH. Specify an appropriate device name,
code page number, and full file name for the page
file. Make sure the device is ready.
2. Examine the CONFIG.SYS file for the following:
a. DISPLAY.SYS for the console;
PRINTER.SYS for the printer.
b. Specify appropriate parameters
throughout.
c. Check additional code pages, editing the
number as required.
d. Restart DOS and try MODE CODEPAGE
again.
You have a hardware problem if you still get the error.

A-20 DOS Message Directory

Device or codepage missing from font file

Command: MODE
Cause: You used MODE PREPARE and specified a possible code
page whose information page does not have the font.
Action: All existing code pages for the device disappear. You must
then prepare them again. Then, restart DOS and try the
command again.

Directory entries adjusted

Command: VDISK (a directive in CONFIG.SYS)

Cause: The number of directory entries specified in the
DEVICE=VDISK.SYS command in the CONFIG.SYS file
may need adjustment.
Action: Change the number of directory entries as necessary.

Directory is joined

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: A directory on the disk being checked has been joined.
Action: Unjoin the directory and run CHKDSK again.

Directory not empty

Command: JOIN
Cause: An attempt was made to join to a non-empty directory.
Action: Join to a new directory which is empty, or empty the
directory and rerun JOIN.

DOS Message Directory A-21

Directory is totally empty, no . or ..

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: A subdirectory does not contain the parent or current
directory entries.
Action: Delete the subdirectory with RMDIR and recreate it using
MKDIR.

Disk error reading FAT [x:]

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: One of the two File Allocation Tables for drive x has a
defective sector in it. DOS automatically uses the good
FAT.
Action: Copy the files to another disk and reformat the disk. If the
sectors for the FAT are still defective, discard the disk.

Disk error writing FAT [x:]

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: One of the two File Allocation Tables for drive x has a
defective sector in it. DOS automatically uses the good
FAT.
Action: Copy the files to another disk and reformat the disk. If the
sectors for the FAT are still defective, discard the disk.

Disk full. Edits lost

Command: EDLIN
Cause: EDLIN could not save your file due to a lack of disk space.
Action: Delete enough files to make room for your document and
re-enter it with EDLIN.

A-22 DOS Message Directory

Disk unsuitable for system drive

Command: FORMAT
Cause: Your command detected a bad track on the disk where the
system files should reside.
Action: This disk should only be used for data. Use another disk if
you want to make a system disk.

Diskette/Drive not compatible

Command: DISKCOMP
Cause: The disks being compared have differing densities.
Action: Compare disks of similar densities.

Divide overflow

Command: DOS
Cause: A program attempted to divide by 0, or a logic error
caused an internal malfunction.
Action: Correct error in program. If the program is purchased,
contact your dealer.

Do you see the leftmost O? (V /N)

Do you see the rightmost 9? (V /N)

Command: MODE
Cause: You get one of the two messages. Both indicate you are
adjusting the display for the color/graphics adapter.
Action: Answer with Yonce a display is centered according to
your needs. Before typing Y, type N if necessary to shift
the display left or right.

DOS Message Directory A-23

Duplicate file name or File not found

Command: RENAME
Cause: Either the file being renamed does not exist, or the new file
name already exists.
Action: Be sure the file being renamed exists, and that the new file
name does not exist.

End of input file

Command: EDLIN
Cause: The entire file has been read into memory. If the file has
been read in sections (using the Append command) this
message is displayed when the last section is read.
Action: No action required.

EOF mark not found

Command: CaMP
Cause: One or both of the files being compared do not contain
End- of-file markers.
Action: No action required.

Entry error

Command: EDLIN
Cause: A command has a syntax error.
Action: Retype the command with the correct syntax.

A-24 DOS Message Directory

Entry has a bad [attribute or link or size]

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: An error condition was detected in one of the subdirectory
entries. The message is preceded by one or two periods to
indicate which entry.
Action: CHKDSK attempts to correct the error when the IF
option is specified.

Error during read of font file

Command: MODE
Cause: DOS detected a disk error while reading the information
file for a code page during a MODE PREPARE. You
probably have a bad sector. The MODE PREPARE aborts
and does not change the prepared fonts.
Action: Run RECOVER on the information file. If RECOVER
reports bad sectors, reformat or discard the disk. Then,
copy . CPI from your DOS startup disk to the hard disk
and try the command again.

Error in EXE file

Command: Several commands can display this error.

Cause: An EXE program attempted to load and execute, and it
has an invalid internal format.
Action: Relink the program or make a new copy to execute. If you
are using a purchased program and error persists, contact
your dealer.

DOS Message Directory A-25

Error opening logfile

Command: BACKUP
Cause: You: omitted the logfile name, used an invalid file name,
gave an incorrect disk drive, or gave an invalid path.
Action: Check your use of the IL switch, and try again.

Error writing to device

Command: Several
Cause: Too much data was sent to a device. DOS was unable to
write the data to the specified device.
Action: Send less data to the device.

Errors found, F parameter not specified

Corrections will not be written to disk

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: CHKDSK detected an error and the IF option was not
specified. Corrective action taken by CHKDSK is not
written to the disk.
Action: Rerun CHKDSK with the IF option.

A-26 DOS Message Directory

Errors on list device indicate that it may be off-line
Please check it

Command: PRINT
Cause: A printer time-out error was detected, or there was a long
printer operation such as a form feed. This message is only
displayed when the PRINT command in executed.
Action: Turn the printer on, or return it to on-line status if
appropriate. If the error occurs during a long printer
operation, ignore the message.

EXEC failure

Command: DOS
Cause: An error is found while reading a command, or the FILES
directive in the CONFIG.SYS file is set too low.
Action: Increase the value for FILES and restart DOS, or check the
integrity of the disk.

Failure to access Codepage Font File

Command: MODE
Cause: MODE PREPARE does not find the specified information
file for the code page.
Action: Check the spelling, drive, and pathname. Make necessary
corrections and try the command again.

DOS Message Directory A-27

Failure to access device: devicename

Command: MODE
Cause: MODE CODEPAGE could not open a device named
devicename.
Action: Check the device name. Be sure CONFIG.SYS has the
device driver. Ensure that the device is connected and
turned on. Then, try the command again.

File allocation table bad

Command: DOS
Cause: A disk may be defective.
Action: Run CHKDSK to check the disk.

File allocation table bad drive (X:)

Command: CHKDSK, PRINT

Cause: A disk may be defective.
Action: Run CHKDSK to check the disk.

File cannot be copied onto itself

Command: DOS

Cause: The specified source is the same as the destination. The

following example shows this:
COpy A A

Action: Check what you want to do, and run the command again.

A-28 DOS Message Directory

File cannot be converted

Command: EXE2BIN
Cause: The input file is not in the correct format.
Action: Execute the command again with an option that accounts
for the desired format. If you get the error again, the file
cannot be converted.

File Creation Error

Command: DOS
Cause: You tried to add a filename or replace a file that already
exists in the directory, or when you tried to edit a
protected file (see PROTECT). If the file already exists, it
is a read-only file and cannot be replaced.
Action: Run CHKDSK on the disk to determine the cause.

File is READ-ONLY

Command: EDLIN
Cause: You tried to change a file that is des.ignated read-only.
Action: Change the permission for the file, and then rerun EDLIN
to make changes.

DOS Message Directory A-29

(filename) file not found

Command: PRINT
Cause: Disks were switched while a file was queued up, but it had
not started to print.
Action: Reissue the PRINT command for that filename.

(filename) is cross linked on cluster

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: Two or more files are cross linked.
Action: Make a copy of the file you want to keep, and then delete
files that are cross linked.

Filename must be specified

Command: EDLIN
Cause: You did not specify a filename at the time you started
EDLIN.
Action: Specify a file to edit in the command line to start EDLIN.

File not found

Command: EDLIN, FC, FIND, MORE, DOS, RECOVER, EXE2BIN,

REN
Cause: DOS cannot find the specified file.
Action: Check your command and try again.

A-30 DOS Message Directory

Files are different sizes

Command: COMP
Cause: Two files are different sizes. The compare operation
terminates.
Action: No action required.

Find: File not found <file name>

Command: FIND

Cause: You specified a file that does not exist.

Action: Make sure you type the filename correctly, and try again.

Find: Invalid number of parameters

Command: FIND
Cause: You specified too many, or not enough, options in the
command line.
Action: Re-enter the command correctly.

Find: Invalid Parameter

Command: FIND

Cause: You specified an incorrect switch.

Action: Re-enter the command correctly.

DOS Message Directory A-31

Find: Read error in filename

Command: FIND
Cause: The program could not read the specified file.
Action: Run CHKDSK to ensure the integrity of the disk and try
again.

Find: Syntax error

Command: FIND
Cause: You typed a command incorrectly.
Action: Check the syntax, and try again.

First cluster number is invalid, entry truncated

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The file directory entry contains an invalid pointer to
the data area. If you specified the IF switch, the file is
truncated to a zero length file.
Action: No action required.

Fix-ups needed - base segment (hex:)

Command: EXE2BIN
Cause: The source (EXE) file contained information indicating
that a load segment is required for the file.
Action: Specify the absolute segment address at which the finished
module is to be located.

A-32 DOS Message Directory

Font file contents invalid

Command: MODE
Cause: MODE PREPARE found the specified code page file but
the file has inappropriate contents. The information file for
the code page has been destroyed, or you specified a name
of an existing file and the file is not an information file for
a code page.
Action: You lose prepared code pages for the device, so copy the
information file for the code page from your DOS startup
disk. Make sure it has appropriate contents, and try the
command again.

For cannot be nested

Command: BATCH COMMAND PROCESSOR

Cause: DOS displays the message when you nest FOR commands
in a batch file.
Action: Check what you want to do, and develop appropriate logic
and commands for the file.

Format failure

Command: FORMAT
Cause: DOS could not format the disk. The message is usually
displayed with an explanation as to why DOS could not
format the disk.
Action: Restart FORMAT with a new disk.

DOS Message Directory A-33

Formatting While Copying

Command: DISKCOPY

Cause: The destination disk is not recognized as a formatted disk.

DISKCOPY will format while it copies from the source
disk.
Action: No action required.

Illegal Device Name

Command: MODE

Cause: You failed to specify a number with LPTx: or COMy:.

You specified a number outside the allowed range (1-3
for LPTx:; 1, 2 for COMy:; 1-3 for PC computers; 4 for
computers running PS/2). You omitted a space between
LPTx: or COMy: and the next parameter. You inserted
more than one space between LPTx: and COMy: and
the next parameter. Or, your system does not have the
specified adapter.
Action: Correct the problem, and try again.

Incorrect DOS version

Command: Many commands can display this message.

Cause: Many versions of DOS 2.00 utilities do not run on other

versions of DOS.
Action: Use the appropriate utilities with the appropriate version
of DOS.

A-34 DOS Message Directory

Incorrect number of parameters

Command: JOIN, SUBST

Cause: You specified too many or too few options in the command
line.
Action: Re-enter the command line correctly.

Incorrect parameter

(~ornrnand: SHARE

Cause: You specified an incorrect option.

Action: Re-enter the command line correctly.

Infinite retry on parallel printer timeout

No retry on parallel printer timeout

Command: MODE
Cause: You used MODE with LPTx: or COMy:. Specifying the P
option gives the first messagej not specifying P gives the
second message.
Action: None required.

Insert diskette for drive (x)

and strike any key when ready

(~ommand: DOS
Cause: DOS is copying or formatting.
Action: Insert a disk in the appropriate drive and press an
alphanumeric key to begin processing.

DOS Message Directory A-3S

Insert disk with batch file
and press any key when ready

Command: DOS
Cause: The disk containing a specified batch file is not in the
originally specified drive.
Action: Reinsert the disk containing the batch file in the
appropriate drive.

Insert DOS diskette into drive (x)

and strike any key when ready

Command: FORMAT
Cause: You specified FORMAT IS, but the disk in the default
drive does not contain DOS system files.
Action: Insert a disk with the files IO.SYS and DOS.SYS in the
specified drive.

Insufficient disk space

Command: DOS, SORT

Cause: The disk is full. It does not contain enough room to
perform the specified operation.
Action: Delete extraneous files from the disk, and try again.

A-36 DOS Message Directory

Insufficient memory for system transfer

Command: FORMAT
Cause: The memory configuration is insufficient to transfer the
DOS system files IO.SYS and MSDOS.SYS (the /S switch)
Action: Re-boot the system with fewer device drivers, virtual disks,
or more memory, and then try again.

Insufficient room in root directory

Erase files in root and repeat CHKDSK

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: CHKDSK always recovers lost files into the root directory.
In this case, your root directory is full.
Action: Delete unused files in the root directory, and try again.

Intermediate file error during pipe

Command: DOS
Cause: The pipe operation makes use of temporary files on the
disk which are automatically deleteq after a piping process
is completed. An error has occurred in one of these files.
Action: Check the integrity of your disk with CHKDSK. Try again
with a new disk.

Invalid baud rate specified

Command: MODE
Cause: You specified a baud rate other than UO, 150, 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600.
Action: Re-enter command line with valid baud rate.

DOS Message Directory A-37

Invalid characters in volume label

Command: FORMAT
Cause: The volume label cont.ains invalid. or too rnaIly~ characters.
Action: Use a LABEL command to ensure that the volume laoe!
contains no more than 11 alphanumeric characters.

Invalid code page specified

Command: KEYB
Cause: You specified a nonexist{'nt code page.
Action: Determine the appropriate value, and try agaiu.

Invalid COMMAND.COM.

Command: DOS
Cause: The program you have just run has used up almost d,ll of
memory. DOS must now reload the COMMAND.COM file
from disk. However, DOS cannot find COMMAND.COM
on the disk, or the copy it found is invalid.
Action: Insert a disk into the default drive that contains a copy of
the COMMAND.COM version you used to start DOS.

Invalid country code

Command: DOS
Cause: You specified a country nmnber in you CONFIG.SYS file
that is not in til(' t abk of count ries configured in thi~
implementation of DOS.
Action: See the COUNTRY COlllIlland for a lbt of coulltry ('Od(,8.

A-3S DOS Message Directory

Invalid keyboard code specified

Command: KEYB
Cause: You specified a nonexistent key code.
Action: Determine the appropriate value, and try again.

Invalid current directory

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: A directory contains invalid information.

Action: When CHKDSK ends, change to the faulty directory and

run the following command to get more information about
what is wrong:
CHKDSK *. * IV
Then, run CHKDSK with IF to fix the problem.

Invalid date

Command: DOS, DATE

Cause: You specified an invalid date in response to the date
prompt when starting DOS.
Action: Retype date correctly.

DOS Message Directory A-39

Invalid device

Command: DOS
Cause: The specified device was not CON, NUL, AUX, or PRN.
Action: Try again with a valid device name.

Invalid directory

Command: DOS
Cause: The specified directory either does not exist or is invalid, or
you tried to access a protected directory (see PROTECT).
Action: Enter the directory name correctly.

Invalid drive 'in search path

Command: DOS
Cause: An invalid drive was detected in the PATH string.
Action: Issue a new PATH command with no invalid drives in it.

Invalid drive or filename

Command: EDLIN, RECOVER

Cause: You need to specify a valid file name.
Action: Specify a drive that is present.

A-40 DOS Message Directory

Invalid drive specification

Command: Many commands display this message

Cause: This error message is displayed by CHKDSK, FORMAT or
SYS when a valid drive needs to be specified.
Action: Specify a valid drive ID.

Invalid drive specification

Specified drive does not exist,
or is non-removable.

Command: DISKCOPY, DISKCOMP

Cause: You specified a drive designator for a drive that does not
exist or a drive that is non-removable.
Action: Reissue the command with an existing, removable drive.

Invalid number of parameters

Command: FIND, DOS, RECOVER

Cause: This error message is displayed by FC, FIND or
RECOVER when there is a wrong number of options in
the command line.
Action: Reissue the command with the correct number of options.

DOS Message Directory A-41

Invalid parameter

Command: Many commands display this message

Cause: This error message is displayed by CHKDSK, EDLIN, FC,

FORMAT or PRINT when one of the specified switches is
wrong.
Action: Check the syntax, and reissue the command.

Invalid parameter
Do not specify filename(s).
Command Format: DISKCOMP d: d: [/1 ][/8]

Command: DISKCOMP
Cause: One or more filenames were encountered. DISKCOMP
only accepts drive designators.
Action: Reissue the command using an appropriate syntax.

Invalid parameter
Do not specify filename{s).
Command Format: DISKCOPY d: d: [/1]

Command: DISKCOPY

Cause: One or more filenames were encountered. DISKCOPYonly

accepts drive designators.
Action: Re-enter the command using an appropriate syntax.

A-42 DOS Message Directory

Invalid path or file name

Command: DOS
Cause: DOS displays the message when a valid path name or
filename to the COPY command needs to be specified, or
when you try to access a protected file (see PROTECT).
Action: Run the command again with an appropriate name.

Invalid path, not directory, or directory not empty

. Command: RMDIR
Cause: You are unable to remove the directory requested for one of
the specified reasons,· or you tried to remove a protected
directory (see PROTECT).
Action: Be sure the directory name exists and is empty, then
reissue the command.

Invalid sub-directory entry

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The specified subdirectory does not exist, or it is invalid.
Action: Check to see that you typed the subdirectory name
correctly.

Invalid switch character

Command: VDISK directive

Cause: The character following the "/" in the command line was
not "E". VDISK will attempt to install the virtual disk in
low memory.
Action: Re-enter command line in CONFIG.SYS file.

DOS Message Directory A-43

Invalid time

Command: DOS, TIME

Cause: You specified an invalid time in response the TIME
prompt.
Action: Enter a valid time in the correct (24-hour) format.

Label not found

Command: DOS batch file processor

Cause: DOS displays the message when there is a GOTO
command to a nonexistent label in a batch file.
Action: Edit the batch file so the label exists, or remove the
reference to the label.

Last file not backed up

Command: BACKUP
Cause: The hard disk is full.
Action: Delete unnecessary files, and try again, or back up on
flexible disks.

Line too long

Command: EDLIN
Cause: The replacement string in a Replace command caused the
line to expand beyond 253 characters.
Action: Divide the long line into two lines and retry the Replace
command.

A-44 DOS Message Directory

List output is not assigned to a device

Command: PRINT
Cause: PRINT displayed the message when you first the command
and you were asked to specify the device to be used as the
as the print spooler. This message also appears if PRINT
is set up for a device that does not exist.
Action: Specify a device name that exists in your system.

Memory allocation error

Command: DOS
Cause: A program has written into "free" memory, preventing
DOS from allocating that memory. The error is usually
fatal.
Action: Restart DOS, and if the error persists, make a new copy of
the DOS disk from your backup copy of the system disk. If
this error occurs consistently with purchased software, see
your dealer.

-More-

Command: MORE
Cause: The program which has piped its output to MORE has
produced more than one screen of data.
Action: Press the spacebar to view more of the file or directory.

DOS Message Directory A-45

MORE: Incorrect DOS version

Command: MORE
Cause: MORE does not run on versions of DOS prior to 2.0.
Action: Use the correct version of MORE and DOS.

Must specify destination line number

Command: EDLIN
Cause: You must specify a destination line number when copying
and inserting lines with EDLIN.
Action: Reissue the command, including the destination line
number.

Must specify ON or OFF

Command: DOS
Cause: The command requires either an ON or an OFF argument.
Action: Reissue the command, specifying either ON or OFF.

Name of list device (PRN):

Command: PRINT
Cause: This prompt appears the first time that PRINT is run,
requesting the PRINT output device.
Action: Specify the device you want to print on.

A-46 DOS Message Directory

New file

Command: EDLIN
Cause: EDLIN did not find a file with the name you specified.
Action: If you are creating a new file, ignore this message. If you
do not intend to create a new file, check to see that you
correctly typed the filename of the file you wish to edit.

No codepage has been SELECTED

Command: MODE
Cause: You executed MODE jSTATUS and have not yet executed
MODE SELECT on a device.
Action: Run MODE SELECT, and try again.

No free file handle

Cannot start COMMAND, exiting

Command: DOS
Cause: COMMAND.COM could not open a file because there are
not enough file handles available in the system.
Action: Restart DOS. Add or increase the number in the FILES
statement in CONFIG.SYS. Then restart DOS again.

No path

Command: PATH
Cause: There is no PATH variable set in the environment.
Action: No action required.

DOS Message Directory A-47

No room in directory for file

Command: EDLIN
Cause: You tried to save a file to the root directory but it is
full. Subdirectories are not limited in size as is the root
directory.
Action: Delete extraneous files from the root, or specify a file name
in a subdirectory. Re-enter your text into EDLIN.

Not enough memory

Command: JOIN, SHARE, SUBST

Cause: There is not enough memory for DOS to run the command.
Action: Reduce the number of installed drivers and virtual disks, or
acquire more memory for your system.

Not enough room for DOS on this disk

Command: SYS
Cause: There is not enough room for the system files on the
destination disk.
Action: Delete some files to make room for the system files or use
another disk. You may need to reformat the disk to put
the system on it.

Not enough room to merge the entire file

Command: EDLIN
Cause: There is not enough room in memory to hold the file
during a Transfer command.
Action: Free some memory by writing some of the text to a disk
before reissuing the Transfer command.

A-48 DOS Message Directory

Not found

Command: EDLIN
Cause: You specified a Search or Replace command that was
unable to find another occurrence of the specified Search or
Replace string.
Action: No action required.

O.K.?

Command: EDLIN
Cause: This prompt occurs during Search and Replace command
processing.
Action: If you press any key except Y or I Return I, the search or
replace process continues.

One or more CON code pages invalid for given

keyboard code

Command: KEYB
Cause: You prepared code ,pages for the console, but the specified
keyboard code is not compatible with them.,
Action: Examine the code pages to note what is wrong with them.
Then, make changes that let the code page work with the
key board code. .

Out of environment space

Command: SET, PATH, PROMPT

Cause: There is not enough room in the program environment to
accept more data.
Action: Remove unnecessary strings from the environment. Reissue
the command.

DOS Message Directory A-49

Path not found

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: You specified an invalid path name.
Action: Check your command, and try again.

Port not installed

Command: MODE
Cause: The specified port (LPTn: or COMn:) is not present in the
system.
Action: Specify a port that is in the system.

Press any key to begin recovery of

the (xxx) file(s) on drive (x:)

Command: RECOVER
Cause: This prompt appears before you recover a disk or file.
Action: Press a key to begin the recover process. Use CQID-I Break I
to end the process.

PRINT queue is full

Command: PRINT
Cause: There is no room in the list of files waiting to be printed.
Action: Wait until some of the waiting files have been printed, or
remove some of them from the queue. Reissue the PRINT
command.

A-50 DOS Message Directory

Probable non-DOS disk
Continue (YIN)?

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: The disk being used is not recognized by this version of
DOS. The disk was either created by another system with
a format that is not supported on this version of DOS or is
not an DOS disk.
Action: If the IF parameter was used, reissue the command
without IF. This displays possible corrections. The disk
may then be recovered with IF, or reformatted.

Processing cannot continue

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: There is not enough memory in your machine to process
CHKDSK for this disk.
Action: Remove some drivers or virtual disks, or obtain more
memory for your system.

Program is too big to fit in memory

Command: DOS
Cause: You must acquire more memory to run your application. It
is possible that some programs you have run are still using
some memory.
Action: You can try to restart DOS, but if you still get the
message, you must acquire more memory.

DOS Message Directory A-51

Resident part of PRINT installed

Command: PRINT
Cause: Available memory has been reduced by several thousand
bytes to process the print command concurrent with other
processes.
Action: No action required.

Re-insert diskette for drive x

Command: FORMAT
Cause: You should reinsert the disk being formatted in the
indicated drive.
Action: Insert the disk to be formatted in the specified drive.

Resync failed. Files are too different

Command: FC
Cause: After FC has detected many differences, it gives up and
displays this message.
Action: Edit the files to remove the reported differences and try
again.

Sector size adjusted

Command: VDISK
Cause: It is necessary to adjust the sector size specified in the
DEVICE=VDISK.SYS command in the CONFIG.SYS file.
Action: Change sector size.

A-52 DOS Message Directory

Sector size too large in file (filename)

Command: -DOS
Cause: The specified device driver loaded by CONFIG.SYS uses a
sector size larger than that of any other device driver on
the system. You cannot run this device driver.
Action: No action required.

SHARE already installed

Command: SHARE
Cause: You tried to install SHARE more than once.
Action: No action required.

SORT: Incorrect DOS version

Command: SORT
Cause: You tried to run SORT on an incorrect version of DOS.
Action: Use the correct version of SORT and DOS.

SORT: Insufficient disk space

Command: SORT
Cause: The disk is full.
Action: Remove some extraneous files from the disk, and try again.

DOS Message Directory A-53

SORT: Insufficient memory

Command: SORT
Cause: There is not enough memory to run the SORT program.
Action: Reduce the amount of data to be sorted.

SOURCE diskette bad or incompatible

Command: DISKCOMP, DISKCOPY

Cause: One of the disks is unformatted or incompatible with the
drive.
Action: Use the a properly formatted disk.

Specified COMMAND search directory bad

Command: DOS
Cause: The SHELL command in the CONFIG.SYS file is
incorrect. The place that you have told DOS to find
COMMAND.COM does not exist, or COMMAND.COM is
not in that place.
Action: Start the SHELL program from the root directory.

Strike a key when ready ...

Command: DOS
Cause: This prompt occurs during command processing and is
always accompanied by another message. This message is
also displayed if you have inserted a Pause command in
a batch file. Usually, you are asked to insert disks into
appropriate drives before this prompt.
Action: Perform the specified task, then press a key.

A-54 DOS Message Directory

Syntax error

Command: FIND
Cause: You typed a command line that FIND cannot interpret.
Action: Check the syntax, and try again.

Target cannot be used for backup

Command: BACKUP
Cause: The destination disk has a problem.
Action: For a flexible disk, try a different disk. For a hard disk, run
CHKDSK, and try again if the disk is alright.

Target diskette is write protected

Correct, then strike any key

Command: DISKCOPY
Cause: The target disk is write-protected.
Action: Write-enable the disk and reinsert it.

Target Diskette may be unusable

Command: DISKCOPY
Cause: Read, write, or verify errors occurred during the copying
process. The target disk may be incomplete.
Action: Compare the two disks with DISKCOMP. Try again. You
might need a new destination disk.

DOS Message Directory A-55

Terminate batch job (YIN)?

Command: DOS
Cause: You pressed ~}{KJ while you were in batch mode. DOS
asks if you want to end batch processing.
Action: Press Y to end processing. Press N to continue the batch
job.

Too many files open

Command: EDLIN
Cause: DOS could not open the BAK file, or a file to edit, due to
lack of system file handles.
Action: Increase the value of the FILES command in the
CONFIG.SYS file.

Track 0 bad - disk unusable

Command: FORMAT
Cause: The FORMAT command cannot accommodate defective
sectors on the disk.
Action: Format another disk.

Unable to create directory

Command: DOS, MKDIR

Cause: DOS could not create a specified directory, or could
not create a subdirectory in a protected directory (see
PROTECT).
Action: Check for a name conflict (you may have a file by the same
name). The disk may be full.

A-56 DOS Message Directory

Unable to create KEYB table in
resident memory

Command: KEYB
Cause: KEYB installs into a predetermined amount of memory.
You added code pages to the console (using other
commands), and you have now attempted to use KEYB
again.
Action: To use additional code pages, restart DOS and run the
MODE commands for code pages before you run KEYB.

Unrecognized command in CONFIG.SYS

Command: CONFIG.SYS
Cause: You have an invalid directive in the CONFIG.SYS file.
Action: The chapter named "System Configuration" in this manual
lists valid directives.

Unrecoverable error in Directory

Convert directory to file (YIN)?

Command: CHKDSK
Cause: There has been an unrecoverable error in directory.
Action: If you type Y, CHKDSK converts the bad directory into a
file. You can then fix the directory yourself, or delete it.

DOS Message Directory A-57

Unrecoverable Read Error on Drive x: Side y, Track z

Command: DISKCOMP, DISKCOPY

Cause: You get the message after several unsuccessful attempts are
made to read the data from the specified track and sector
on the disk in the indicated drive.
Action: You can RECOVER as many files as possible, copy the files
to another disk, and try to reformat the disk.

Unrecoverable Write Error on Drive x: Side y, Track z

Command: DISKCOPY
Cause: You get this message after several unsuccessful attempts
are made to write data to the specified track and sector on
the disk in the indicated drive.
Action: You can RECOVER as many files as possible, copy the files
to another disk, and try to reformat the disk.

VDISK not installed - buffer too small

Command: VDISK
Cause: The virtual disk drive cannot be installed due to an
incorrect buffer size.
Action: Change buffer size.

A-58 DOS Message Directory

VOISK not installed - insufficient memory

Command: VDISK
Cause: The virtual disk drive cannot be installed due to
insufficient memory. The system has insufficient memory
when less than 64 Kbytes of system memory would be left
after the virtual disk is installed.
Action: Change buffer size.

VOISK not installed - no extended memory

Command: VDISK
Cause: You specified the IE switch, but the system does not have
extended memory, or the amount of available extended
memory is insufficient to contain the virtual disk even after
adjusting the parameters.
Action: Ensure that you have enough extended memory to run
VDISK, or reduce the size of VDISK.

Volume label (II characters, ENTER for none)?

Command: FORMAT
Cause: You specified the IV switch in the FORMAT command.
Action: Specify a volume label or press I Return I to indicate that you
do not want a volume label for the disk.

DOS Message Directory A-59

WARNING, ALL DATA ON NON-REMOVABLE DISK
DRIVE X WILL BE LOST!
Proceed with Format (YIN)?

Command: FORMAT
Cause: There is data on the hard disk you are trying to format.
Action: If you want to lose the data and format the disk, press Y
(for "Yes"). If you do not want the files on your hard disk
erased press N (for "No"). Copy the files to a flexible disk
and repeat the FORMAT command.

Warning - directory full

Command: RECOVER
Cause: The root directory is too full for RECOVER processing.
Action: Delete some files in the root directory to free space.

Warning! No files were found to back up

Command: BACKUP
Cause: No files on the source disk matched your specification.
Action: Run DIR to list your files. Then, try again with an
appropriate specification.

Warning: Read error in EXE file

Command: EXE2BIN
Cause: The amount of data read was less than the size of the
header. This is a warning message only.
Action: None required.

A-60 DOS Message Directory

 B
Configuration Command Reference

Overview
MS-DOS includes special configuration commands that can be placed in a system
file, named config.sys. config.sys can be created using EDLIN or any word
processor that creates unformatted files. Each time MS:-DOS is booted, the
configuration commands in config.sys are executed. With the exception of
BREAK, configuration commands can only be used within config.sys.
MS-DOS also allows you to add extensions to MS-DOS using device drivers.
Device drivers allow peripheral devices not already supported by MS-DOS to be
added to the system, and provide enhanced support for certain standard system
components. Four device drivers are provided with your system: VDISK.SYS,
ANSLSYS, PEMM.SYS and NETDRVR.SYS.
The configuration commands and supplied device drivers are detailed in the
remaining pages of this chapter. For instructions for editing and using config.sys,
see your Using the Series 300 DOS Coprocessor or SoftPC User's Guide manual.

Configuration Command Reference B-1

ANSI.SYS

Purpose
ANSLSYS is a device driver that can be loaded with the DEVICE command.
The ANSI.SYS driver supports extended keyboard and screen display features.

Syntax

DEVICE = ANSI>SYS

Operation
When this driver is installed, ANSI standard terminal escape sequences will be
executed by the standard input and output device. ANSLSYS replaces the CON
device driver. The sequences are described in the appendix titled Extended Screen
and Keyboard Control.

B-2 Configuration Command Reference

BREAK

Purpose
The BREAK command enables or disables extended I CTRL HBreak I and I CTRL H:f:J
checking.

Syntax

BREAK = ON I OFF

Operation
MS-DOS checks for a I CTRL HBreak I or I CTRL HQJ keyboard sequence during
all standard I/O, standard printer, and standard auxiliary operations. If the
extended checking is enabled, MS-DOS will also check during disc operations.
The default state of the extended checking is off when MS-DOS is booted;
however, the config.sys file provided with the DOS Coprocessor software includes
the command:
BREAK = ON
which enables the extended I CTRL HBreak I and I CTRL HQJ checking.

Note

1. This command is functionally identical to the MS-DOS BREAK com-

mand.

Configuration Command Reference 8-3

BUFFERS

Purpose
The BUFFERS command specifies the number of disc I/O buffers.

Syntax

BUFFERS = <n>

Operation
<n> is the number of buffers, and may range from 1 to 99. The default number
of buffers used by MS-DOS is 3. To increase the number of buffers to 10, place
the command:
BUFFERS = 10
in the config.sys file.
The use of buffers may increase the speed of certain applications. As data is
read from the disc, it is stored in a buffer. The buffers are used by MS-DOS in
a manner that ensures that the most recently read data is in one of the buffers.
The performance of applications that perform a large number of random reads
and writes on a data file may be increased by using additional buffers. As the
number of buffers increases, the chances increase that the data requested by
the application program is already in one of the buffers. Thus, MS-DOS can
retrieve the data from memory instead of from disc, which speeds up program
performance.
For applications which perform mostly sequential read and write operations, there
is little performance gain from an increased number of buffers.
There is no precise formula to calculate the optimum number of buffers. Different
values must be tried to determine the number of buffers that yields maximum
performance. In general, applications which perform large amounts of random
data access will perform best with between 10 and 25 buffers.
Many application programs tell you how to set the BUFFERS command for
optimum performance.

8-4 Configuration Command Reference

Notes

1. Each additional buffer specified increases the resident size of MS-DOS

by 528 bytes. When a large number of buffers is specified, the amount of
memory available to an application program may be significantly reduced.
2. In certain cases, a large number of buffers may actually decrease system
performance. If the number of buffers is too large, it may take more time
to search through the buffers than to read the data from disc.

Configuration Command Reference 8-5

COUNTRY

Purpose
Selects the display format for the system time and date, currency symbol, and
decimal separator based on the selected country.

Syntax

COUNTRY = <nnn>

Operation
<nnn> is a three-digit country code. The country code for each country is listed
below.

Country Code Country Code

United States 001 Netherlands 031
Belgium 032 France 033
Spain 034 Italy 039
Switzerland 041 United Kingdom 044
Denmark 045 Sweden 046
Norway 047 Germany 049
Mexico 052 Argentina 054
Venezuela 058 Austria 061
Finland 358 Israel 972

8-6 Configuration Command Reference

To select the United Kingdom display format for time, date, decimal separator,
and currency symbol, place the command:
COUNTRY = 044
in the config.sys file.

Notes

1. The COUNTRY command does not translate MS-DOS messages and

prompts, or change the video or keyboard character set.
2. If your country is not listed above, pick a country code which most closely
matches your needs.

Configuration Command Reference 8-7

DEVICE

Purpose
The DEVICE command is used to load installable device drivers into the system.

Syntax

DEVICE = [<d> :] [<path>]<jilename>[.<ext>]

Operation
DEVICE loads a file containing an installable device driver. The driver IS
incorporated into the resident portion of MS-DOS.
To install the MS-DOS virtual disc drive, VDISK, enter the command:
DEVICE = VDISK.SYS
The size of the resident portion of MS-DOS will be increased by the Size of each
device driver installed.

Note

1. Four installable device drivers are provided with the DOS Coprocessor.
They are VDISK.SYS, which provides the ability to use system RAM as a
virtual disc, ANSI.SYS, which provides ANSI display terminal emulation
for the standard output device, PEMM.SYS which provides access to
expanded memory compatible with the Lotus/Intel/Microsoft Expanded
Memory Specification, which provides support for accessing the HP-UX
file system via drive D:.

8-8 Configuration Command Reference

FeBS

Purpose
The FCBS command specifies the number of File Control Blocks (FCBs) which
can be concurrently open with the share attribute set.

Syntax

FCBS = <x>, <y>

Operation
<x> sets the maximum number of files which can be concurrently open, and
<y> the number of open files which are "protected" (see below). The command
line:
FCBS = 10.5
in the config.sys file will allow 10 shared files open concurrently, with the first 5
"protected" .
Some application programs use FCBs to keep track of files they are using.
The <x> parameter specified in the FCBS command determines the maximum
number of files which can be accessed with FCBs if the SHARE command has
been issued. The default value is 4 and the range is 1 to 255.
MS-DOS keeps track of which FCB (or file) was least recently used. If an
application program attempts to open more files than specified and file-sharing
has been loaded, MS-DOS will close the least recently used file prior to opening
the requested file. The <y> parameter protects the first y files from being closed
in this manner. If <y> is set equal to <x>, then files will not be closed and the
application program will be unable to open any files in excess of the maximum.
If the <y> parameter is not entered, MS-DOS will set it to O.

Configuration Command Reference 8-9

Notes

1. The maximum number of files concurrently open applies only to shared

files. No action is taken by MS-DOS if the maximum number of files is
exceeded, provided the SHARE command has not been executed.
2. If the FeBS command is included in the config.sys file, the resident size
of MS-DOS is increased.

8-10 Configuration Command Reference

FILES

Purpose
The FILES command specifies the number of file handles which can be open
concurrently.

Syntax

FILES= <n>

Operation
<n> is the number of file handles MS-DOS is to reserve space for. The default
number is 8 and can range from 8 to 255. The command line:
FILES = 10
in the config.sys file will reserve enough room for 10 file handles.
A pplications may create their own FCBs or they may open handles to access
files. When an application opens a handle, MS-DOS creates a control block for
the program. The FILES command determines the amount of space MS-DOS
reserves for these control blocks, and hence the maximum number of handles
which may be open concurrently.

Notes

1. Each handle over 8 increases the size of the resident size of MS-DOS by
48 bytes.
2. There is no limit to the number of files an application program may have
open when those files are opened through FCBs instead of handles, unless
the SHARE command has been executed, in which case the maximum is
set by the FCBS command.
3. This number is the total number of handles open for the entire system.
A process may have a maximum of 20 files open at any time.

Configuration Command Reference 8-11

LASTDRIVE

Purpose
The LASTDRIVE command sets the maximum number of drives which may be
accessed on the system.

Syntax

LASTDRIVE = <d>

Operation
<d> is any letter A through Z. The LASTDRIVE command sets the last valid
drive letter for the system. The command line:
LASTDRIVE =G
in the config.sys file will provide 7 disc drive letters, A: through G:. The default
value is 5 drives, A: through E:.
Each block device driver, subdirectory assigned via the SUBST command, and
disc drive requires a drive designator. If the total of these exceeds five, a
LASTDRIVE command must be placed in the config.sys file to increase the
number of valid drive letters.

Note

1. If the last valid drive designator specified with the LASTDRIVE

command is not high enough to accommodate the systeln disc drives and
any installed block devices, the value specified in the command is ignored,
and MS-DOS determines the highest required designator. In this situation
though, there will be no unused drive designators for use with SUBST.

8-12 Configuration Command Reference

PEMM.SYS

Purpose
The DEVICE command loads PEMM.SYS, a device driver that provides for
accessing the expanded memory compatible with the Lotus/Intel/Microsoft
Expanded Memory Specification (version 4.0).

Syntax
DEVICE=PEMM. SYS IH:nnn IV
Switch provides verbose information
Provides a handle to programs

Operation
The examples shown in the table illustrate how to use the command. The
following Notes provide additional information.

Command Result / Action

device = pemm. sys IH: 100 IV Installs the support provided by PEMM.SYS.
The /H:100 sets up 100 handles, and the /V
instructs the driver to print information about the
configuration at initialization time.

Configuration Command Reference 8-13

Notes

• This driver runs on DOS Coprocessor only.

• The IH:nnn option sets up handles for programs. Not using the switch
defaults to 64 handles, which is adequate for most situations (you should
not change the value unless you know why you need to change it). The
range for nnn is 32 to 255. Each handle uses 24 bytes of meulOry. Using
a value less than the default reduces the size of the installed driver, and
conversely. Each program that uses expanded memory uses one handle.
An environment rnanager that runs multiple prograrns may open IIlOre
than one handle.
• The IV option instructs the driver to print configuration information at
initialization time. Using the option lets you see what happens.
• Installing PEMM.SYS lets you allocate expanded meIIlory in the EXP-
MEM line of DOS.CNF or with the -expm option in the DOS startup
comnland line (for example, DOS -expm).
• The LIM Expanded l\femory Specification lets you allocate more than the
standard limit of 640 Kbytes of memory for use with specific applications
(for example, LOTUS 123). In this example, allocating more memory lets
you work with larger spreadsheets, among other things.
• The driver allocates memory from your computer system's virtual
memory. Therefore, the allocated IIlemory cannot exceed the memory
available in your system's swap space.

8-14 Configuration Command Reference

SHELL

Purpose
The SHELL command allows an alternate command processor to be selected.

Syntax

SHELL = [<d> :][<path>]<filename>[.ext>]

Operation
The SHELL command substitutes an alternate command processor specified
in the command line to replace COMMAND.COM. PAM is an example of an
alternate comlnand processor. It is substituted for COMMAND. COM using the
following command line:
SHELL = PAMCODE.COM ROOT

in the config.sys file.

If this command is not included, MS-DOS starts the default command interpreter,
COMMAND. COM.

Note

1. The word "ROOT" in the example above is interpreted by PAMCODE,

and is not required for other command interpreters.

Configuration Command Reference 8-15

VDISK.SYS

Purpose
VDISK.SYS is a device driver that can be loaded with the DEVICE command.
The VDISK block device driver allows a portion of the computer's RAM to be
used as a disc drive.
These block devices (which emulate a physical disc drive) are sometimes referred
to as "RAM discs" or "virtual discs". The virtual discs can be used in the
same manner as other system disc drives with the exception of a few MS-DOS
commands such as FORMAT, CHKDSK, etc. VDISK.SYS will allow either
system RAM or extended memory (above 1 Mbyte) to be used as the virtual
disc. In addition, more than one virtual disc at a time can be installed in your
system.
Virtual discs are much faster than physical disc drives, but their contents will be
lost when the system is reset or loses power.
Since the contents of a virtual disc are lost when the system is turned off or reset,
files must be transferred to the disc when the system is started, and back to a
flexible or hard disc before the system is reset. This task can be accomplished with
either the MS-DOS COpy or BACKUP/RESTORE commands. DISKCOPY
will not work with a virtual disc.

Syntax
DEVICE = [<d> :] [<path>]VDISK.SYS [<bbb>] [<888>] [<ddd>]
[lEI: <m>]]

8-16 Configuration Command Reference

Operation
VDISK's optional parameters are defined below:
< bbb> This is the virtual disc size in Kbytes. It is specified as a decimal
val ue ranging between 1 and the amount of memory you have in your
computer. The default value is 64 Kbytes. VDISK.SYS may adjust the
amount of memory actually used for the virtual disc as follows:
If your computer has less than 64 Kbytes of available memory at the
time VDISK.SYS is being installed, VDISK.SYS issues an error message
and does not install VDISK.
If the size you specify is either less than 1 Kbyte or greater than the
amount of memory in your computer, VDISK uses the default values of
64 Kbytes.
If VDISK.SYS adjusts the size entered as <bbb>, a message will be
displayed.
<sss> This is the sector size in bytes. Sector sizes of 128, 256, or 512 bytes
are permitted. If this parameter is omitted, or if an incorrect value is
entered, VDISK.SYS uses the default value of 128 bytes. If you are
going to use your VDISK to store many small files, the smaller sector
sizes will give you better space efficiency. The larger sector sizes will
give you better performance, however. If VDISK.SYS adjusts the sector
size entered, a message will be displayed.
<ddd> This is the number of directory entries the VDISK can contain in its
root directory. <ddd> is specified as a decimal value ranging from 2
through 512. The default value is 64. VDISK.SYS may adjust the
values you enter as follows:
The value is adjusted upward to the nearest sector size boundary.
For example, if your sector size is 256 and you specify a value of 17,
VDISK.SYS generates 24 directory entries. (Seventeen entries at 32
bytes per entry equals 544 bytes, which is not an even multiple of your
sector size. Twenty-four entries occupy 768 bytes, which is a multiple
of the sector size.)
If you specify a VDISK size that is too small to hold the file allocation
table, the root directory, and two additional sectors, the directory size is

Configuration Command Reference 8-17

 adjusted downward one sector at a time until these conditions are met.
If the directory size reaches 1 sector and the conditions still cannot
be met, VDISK.SYS issues an error message and the VDISK is not
installed.
If VDISK.SYS adjusts the number of directory entries, a message will
be displayed.
IE This option instructs VDISK.SYS to create the VDISK in extended
memory (menlory at or above 1 Mbyte), although the driver code will
still be installed in low memory.
If you specify the parameter, and the memory is not present, VDISK.SYS
issues an error message and the VDISK is not installed. See "Configur-
ing Memory" in the configuration chapter of Using the Series 300 DOS
Coprocessor.
<m> This is the maximum number of data sectors (of size <sss» that
VD ISK. SYS transfers back and forth fronl extended memory at one
time. Acceptable values for <m> range from 1 through 8, and the
default value is 8. This parameter is only valid when the IE option has
been specified.
When VDISK is operating in extended memory, interrupt servicing is suspended
during data transfers. If frequent interrupts occur during data transfers, some
of the interrupts may be lost. This might be a problem in certain data
communication or other applications. Reduce the value of <m> until no
interrupts are lost. If an <m> of 1 and <sss> of 128 does not improve the
situation, then you cannot use VDISK in extended memory in that particular
environment. If VDISK is installed in system memory, and the problem of lost
interrupts is not solved, investigate other areas that might be involved.

8-18 Configuration Command Reference

More than one VDISK may be installed by inserting additional DEVICE =
VDISK.SYS commands in the config.sys file. Each VDISK increases the resident
size of MS-DOS by 720 bytes. Once a VDISK has been installed, the following
sign-on message will appear each time MS-DOS is booted.
DISK Version 2.0 virtual disk x

where x is the drive designator assigned to the VDISK. Below this message the
values of the three parameters are displayed as shown.
Buffer size: <bbb>
Sector size: <sss>
Directory entries: <ddd>

Notes

1. You must place DEVICE = VDISK.SYS lines following all other DEVICE
lines in the config.sys file.
2. This driver is not supported on SoftPC.

Configuration Command Reference 8-19

 c
HP-UX Commands
This appendix contains HP-UX reference pages for DOS-related HP-UX com-
mands.

HP-UX Commands C-1

This page has no reference information.

C-2 HP-UX Commands

DOS2UX(1) DOS2UX(1)

NAME
dos2ux, ux2dos - convert ASCII file format
SYNOPSIS
dos2ux file .. .
ux2dos file .. .
DESCRIPTION
Dos2ux and ux2dos read each specified file in sequence and write it to standard output, convert-
ing to HP-UX format or to DOS format, respectively. Each file can be either DOS format or HP-
UX format for either command.
A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4)
for DOS file naming conventions.
If no input file is given or if the argument - is encountered, dos2ux and ux2dos read from stan-
dard input. Standard input can be combined with other files.
'EXAMPLES
The following prints file myfile on the display:
dos2ux myfile
The following converts file! and file2 to DOS format, then concatenates them together, placing
them in file3.
ux2dos filet file2 > file3
RETURN VALUE
Both commands return 0 if successful or 2 if the command failed. The only possible failure is
the inability to open a specified file, in which case the commands print a warning.
WARNINGS
Command formats resembling:
dos2ux file! file2 > file!
overwrite the data in file! before the concatenation begins, causing a loss of the contents of
file!. Therefore, be careful when using shell special characters.
SEE ALSO
doschmod(l), doscp(l), dosdf(l), dosls(1), dosmkdir(1), dosrm(l), dosif(4).

Hewlett-Packard Company - 1- Release 7.0: September 1989

DOSCHMOD(1) DOSCHMOD(l)

NAME
doschmod - change attributes of a DOS file
SYNOPSIS
doschmod [-u] mode device :file ...
DESCRIPTION
Doschmod is the DOS counterpart of chmod(l).
There is one option:
-u Disable argument case conversion. In the absence of this option, all DOS file
names are converted to upper case.
A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4)
for DOS file naming conventions.
The attributes of each named file are changed according to mode, which is an octal number in
the range 000 to 0377. Mode is constructed from the logical OR of the following modes:
200 Reserved. Do not use.
100 Reserved. Do not use.
040 Archive. Set whenever the file has been written to and closed.
020 Directory. Do not modify.
010 Volume Label. Do not modify.
004 System file. Marks files that are part of the DOS operating system.
002 Hidden file. Marks files that do not appear in a DOS directory listing using
the DOS DIR command.
001 Read-Only file. Marks files as read-only.
SPECIAL WARNING
Specifying inappropriate mode values can make files andj or directories inaccessible, and in cer-
tain cases can damage the file system. To prevent such problems, do not change the mode of
directories and volume labels.
Normal users should have no need to use mode bits other than 001, 002, and 040.
EXAMPLES
The following marks file jdev jrfd9122:memo.txt as a hidden file:
doschmod 002 /dev jrfd9122:memo.txt
The following marks file driveC:autoexec.bat read-only:
doschmod 001 driveC:autoexec.bat
SEE ALSO
chmod(l), dos2ux(1), doscp(l), dosdf(l), dosls(l), dosmkdir(l), dosrm(l), chmod(2), dosif(4).

Hewlett-Packard Company - 1- Release 7.0: September 1989

DOSCP(1) DOSCP(l)

NAME
doscp - copy to or from DOS files
SYNOPSIS
doscp [-fvu] filel file2
doscp [-fvu] filel [file2 ... ] directory
DESCRIPTION
Doscp is the DOS counterpart of cp(l). Doscp copies a DOS file to a DOS or HP-UX file, an HP-UX
file to an HP-UX or DOS file, or HP-UX or DOS files to an HP-UX or DOS directory. The last
name in the argument list is the destination file or directory.
A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4)
for DOS file naming conventions.
The file name - (dash) is interpreted to mean standard input or standard output depending
upon its position in the argument list.
Options
There are several options:
-f Unconditionally write over an existing file. In the absence of this option, doscp
asks permission to overwrite an existing HP-UX file.
-v Verbose mode. Doscp prints the source name.
-u Disable argument case conversion. In the absence of this option, all DOS file
names are converted to upper case.
Note: Shell metacharacters (*, ?, and [... J) can be used when specifying HP-UX file names, but
cannot be used when specifying a DOS file name, because file name expansion is done by the
shell and the DOS utilities do not recognize metacharacters.
RETURN VALUE
Doscp returns 0 if all files are copied successfully. Otherwise, it prints a message to standard
error and returns with a non-zero value.
EXAMPLES
Copy the files in the HP-UX directory abc to the DOS volume stored as HP-UX file hard_disk:
doscp abc/* hard_disk:
Copy DOS file /backup/log through the HP-UX special file /dev/dd9127 to HP-UX file logcopy
located in the current directory:
doscp /dev /rfd9127:/backup/log logcopy
Copy DOS file zulu on the volume stored as HP-UX file bb to standard output:
doscp bb:zulu -
SEE ALSO
cp(l), dos2ux(1), doschmod(l), dosdf(l), dosls(l), dosmkdir(l), dosrm(l), dosif(4).

Hewlett-Packard Company - 1- Release 7.0: September 1989

DOSDF(1) DOSDF(1)

NAME
dosdf - report number of free disk clusters
SYNOPSIS
dosdf device[:]
DESCRIPTION
Dosdf is the DOS counterpart of df(1). It prints the cluster size in bytes and the number of free
clusters on the specified DOS volume.
SEE ALSO
df(l), dos2ux(1), doschmod(l), doscp(l), dosls(l), dosmkdir(l), dosrm(l), dosif(4).

Hewlett-Packard Company - 1- Release 7.0: September 1989

DOSLS(1) DOSLS(1)

NAME
dosls, dosll - list contents of DOS directories
SYNOPSIS
dosls [-aAudl] device: [file]
dosH [-aAudl] device: [file]
DESCRIPTION
Dosis is the DOS counterpart of Is(1).
For each directory named, dosls lists the contents of that directory. For each file named, dosls
repeats its name and any other information requested. If invoked by the name dosll, the -1
option is implied.
Options
There are several options:
-a List all directory entries. In the absence of this option, hidden files, system files,
and files whose names begin with a dot (.) are not listed.
-A Same as -a, except the current directory and the parent directory are not listed.
For the superuser, this option defaults to being set, and IS disabled by -A.
-u Disable 'argument case conversion. In the absence of this option, all DOS file
names are converted to uppercase.
-d If an argument is a directory, list only its name. Often used with -I to get the
status of a directory.
-I List in long format, giving file attribute, size in bytes, and the date and time of
last modification for each file, as well as listing the DOS volume label. Long
listing is disabled if dosll is invoked with the -I option.
A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4)
for DOS file naming conventions.
EXAMPLES
These examples assume that a DOS directory structure exists on the device accessed through
HP-UX special file /dev /rdsk/Osl.
The following example lists all of the files in the root directory of the DOS directory structure:
dosls -a /dev /rdsk/Osl:
The following example produces a long-format listing of all the information about the DOS
directory /dos/math, but does not list the files in the directory:
dosls -Id /dev /rdsk/Osl:/dos/math
SEE ALSO
dos2ux(l), doschmod(1), doscp(l), dosdf(1), dosmkdir(1), dosrm(l), Is(1), dosif(4).

Hewlett-Packard Company - 1- Release 7.0: September 1989

DOSMKDIR (1) DOSMKDIR(1)

NAME
dosmkdir - make a DOS directory
SYNOPSIS
dosmkdir [-u] device: directory ...
DESCRIPTION
Dosmkdir is the DOS counterpart of mkdir(l). It creates specified directories. The standard
entries, . for the directory itself and .. for its parent, are made automatically.
There is one option:
-u Disable argument case conversion. In the absence of this option, all DOS file
names are converted to uppercase.
A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4)
for DOS file naming conventions.
DIAGNOSTICS
Dosmkdir returns 0 if all directories were successfully created. Otherwise, it prints a message to
standard error and returns non-zero.
EXAMPLES
To create an empty subdirectory named numbers under the directory /math/lib on the device
accessed through HP-UX special file /dev /rfd9122, use:
dosmkdir /dev /rfd9122:/math/lib/numbers
SEE ALSO
dos2ux(1), doschmod(l), doscp(l), dosdf(l), dosls(l), dosrm(l), mkdir(l), dosif(4).

Hewlett-Packard Company -1- Release 7.0: September 1989

DOSRM(1) DOSRM(1)

NAME
dosrm, dosrmdir - remove DOS files or directories
SYNOPSIS
dosrm [-friu] device :file .. .
dosrmdir [-u] device :file .. .
DESCRIPTION
Dosrm and dosrmdir are DOS counterparts of rm(l) and rmdir(l), respectively.
Dosrm removes the entries for one or more files from a directory. If a specified file is a direc-
tory, an error message is printed unless the optional argument -r is specified (see below).
Dosrmdir removes entries for the named directories, provided they are empty.
Options
The options are:
-f (force) Unconditionally remove the specified file, even if the file is marked
read-only.
-r Cause dosrm to recursively delete the entire contents ofa directory, followed by
the directory itself. Dosrm can recursively delete up to 17 levels of directories.
-i (interactive) Cause dosrm to ask whether or not to delete each file. If -r is also
specified, dosrm asks whether to examine each directory encountered.
-u Disable argument case conversion. In the absence of this option, all DOS file
names are converted to uppercase.
A DOS file name is recognized by the presence of an embedded colon (:) delimiter; see dosif(4)
for DOS file naming conventions.
EXAMPLES
These examples assume that a DOS directory structure exists on the device accessed through the
HP-UX special file jdev jrfd9122.
This example recursively combs through the DOS directory jtmp and asks if each DOS file
should be removed (forced, with no file mode checks):
dosrm -irf jdev jrfd9122:jtmp
The following example removes the DOS directory doug from the DOS volume stored as HP-UX
file hard_disk: .
dosrmdir hard_disk:doug
SEE ALSO
dos2ux(1), doschmod(l), doscp(l), dosdf(1), dosls(l), dosmkdir(l), rm(l), rmdir(l), dosif(4).

Hewlett-Packard Company -1- Release 7.0: September 1989

DOSIF(4) DOSIF(4)

NAME
DOSIF - DOS Interchange Format description
DESCRIPTION
DOSIF (DOS Interchange Format) is the name given to the media format used by the DOS
operating system. This format is based upon that used in IBM PC and PC AT, HP Vectra, and HP
150 systems.
The DOS utilities described in Section 1 (referred to hereafter as dos*(1)) are provided for read-
ing data from and writing data to DOSIF volumes. Use these utilities to retrieve information
from a DOSIF volume.
The dos*(1) utilities are the only HP-UX commands that can interact directly with the contents
of a DOSIF volume. The only other way to interact with the contents of a DOSIF volume is to
use an HP-UX DOS emulation or coprocessor facility such as SoftPC or the DOS Coprocessor.
Mount(l) cannot be used on a DOSIF volume because the operating system does not recognize
it.
When constructing file names for dos*(1) commands, start with the HP-UX path name of the
DOSIF volume, then add a colon (:) followed by the file name:
device_file: file
or
path_name: file
Note: This file naming convention is suitable for use only in arguments to the dos*(1) utilities.
It does not constitute a legal path name for any other use in HP-UX.
Note: Shell metacharacters (*, ?, and [ ... J) can be used to name HP-UX files, but cannot be used
when specifying a DOS file name, because file name expansion is done by the shell and the
dos* (1) utilities do not recognize metacharacters.
By convention, if the HP-UX device name and a trailing colon are specified, but no file or direc-
tory name is provided (for example, /dev /rfd.O:), the root U) of the DOS file system is assumed.
EXAMPLES
Specify DOSIF file /dos/ivy accessed through HP-UX special file /dev /rfd9127:
/dev /rfd9127:/dos/ivy
Specify DOSIF file /math accessed through the DOS volume stored as HP-UX file
/users/mydir/driveC:
/users/mydir/driveC:/math
SEE ALSO
dos2ux(1), doschmod(I), doscp(I), dosdf(I), dosls(I), dosmkdir(l), dosrm(l).

Hewlett-Packard Company - 1- Release 7.0: September 1989

Index

A
A (append) command (EDLIN) 4-9
A (assemble) command (DEBUG) 5-11
Abort, Ignore, Retry prompt A-2
absolute paths 1-6
Addressing, memory 5-6
ANSI.SYS device driver B-2
APPEND 2-2
Append command (EDLIN) 4-9
Assemble (A) command (DEBUG) 5-11
ASSIGN 2-4
ATTRIB 2-6

B
BACKUP 2-8
Batch files (.BAT) 3-1
Batch processing
Description 3-1
Displaying messages 3-12
ECHO command 3-6
Execution 3-2
FOR command 3-8
GOTO command 3-10
IF command 3-11
Labels 3-10
Limitations 3-1
PAUSE command 3-12
Posi tional parameters 3-2, 3-14
REM command 3-13
Replaceable parameters 3-2, 3-14
SET command 3-4
SHIFT command 3-14

Index-1
BREAK 2-14
BREAK command B-3
BUFFERS command B-4

c
C (compare) command (DEBUG) 5-13
C (copy) command (EDLIN) 4-10
characters
reserved 1-8
wildcard 1-10
CHCP 2-16
CHDIR 2-18
CHKDSK 2-20
Class 6-4
CLS 2-22
Code segment 5-6
COMMAND 2-24
Command processors B-15
Command-line method (MS-LINK) 6-13
commands
APPEND 2-2
·ASSIGN 2-4
ATTRIB 2-6
BACKUP 2-8
BREAK 2-14
CHCP 2-16
CHDIR 2-18
CHKDSK 2-20
CLS 2-22
COMMAND 2-24
COMP 2-26
COPY 2-28
CTTY 2-32
DATE 2-34
DEL 2-36
DIR 2-38
DISKCOMP 2-40
DISKCOPY 2-42
DOS2UX 2-48
DOSMOUNT 2-44
ERASE 2-50

Index-2
EXE2BIN 2-52
EXIT 2-54
FASTOPEN 2-56
FC 2-58
FDISK 2-62
FIND 2-64
FOR150 2-70
FORMAT 2-66
GRAFTABL 2-72
GRAPHICS 2-74
internal and external 1-15
JOIN 2-78
KEYB 2-80
LABEL 2-84
MKDIR 2-86
MODE communications 2-94
MODE display adapter 2-92
MODE information 2-88
MODE parallel printer 2-90
MODE prepare codepage 2-98
MODE reestablish codepage 2-104
MODE select codepage 2-102
MODE serial printing 2-96
MODE status 2-106
MORE 2-108
NLSFUNC 2-112
PATH 2-116
PRINT 2-118
PROMPT 2-122
RECOVER 2-124
REDIR 2-128
RENAME 2-130
REPLACE 2-132
RESTORE 2-136
RMDIR 2-140
running them 1-17
SELECT 2-142
SET 2-144
SORT 2-148
SUBST 2-150
SYS 2-152

Index-3
 TIME 2-154
TREE 2-156
TYPE 2-158
using symbols 1-14
UX2DOS 2-160
VER 2-162
VERIFY 2-164
VOL 2-166
XDIR 2-168
Commands
BREAK (configuration file) B-3
BUFFERS (configuration file) B-4
Conditional execution (batch files) 3-11
COUNTRY (configuration file) B-6
DEVICE (configuration file) B-8
ECHO (batch files) 3-6
FCBS (configuration file) B-9
FILES (configuration file) B-11
FOR (batch files) 3-8
GOTO (batch files) 3-10
IF (batch files) 3-11
Interrupting execution B-3
Iterative execution (batch files) 3-8
LASTDRIVE (configuration file) B-12
PAUSE (batch files) 3-12
PEMM-SYS (configuration file) B-13
REM (batch files) 3-13
SHELL (configuration file) B-15
SHIFT (batch files) 3-14
Common combinations 6-6
COMP 2-26
Compare (C) command (DEBUG) 5-13
Conditional command execution (batch files) 3-11
Config.sys file B-1
Configuration commands
ANSI.SYS B-2
BREAK B-3
BUFFERS B-4
COUNTRY B-6
DEVICE B-8
FCnS B-9

Index-4
 FILES B-11
LASTDRIVE 3-12
PEMM-SYS B-13
SHELL B-15
VDISK.SYS B-16
Configuration file B-1
COpy 2-28
Copy (C) command (EDLIN) 4-10
COUNTRY command B-6
Crash, system 5-7
Creating
Files 4-1
CTTY 2-32
Currency symbol format, setting B-6
cursor and prompt 1-4

o
D (delete) command (EDLIN) 4-13
D (dump) command (DEBUG) 5-14
Data segment 5-6
Date
Format, setting B-6
DATE 2-34
DEBUG
Assemble (A) command 5-11
Command parameters 5-3
Command syntax 5- 2
Compare (C) command 5-13
Description 5-1
Dump (D) command 5-14
Enter (E) command 5-16
Error messages 5-41
Fill (F) command 5-18
Flags 5-9
Go (G) command 5-19
Hex (H) command 5-21
Input (I) command 5-22
Load (L) command 5-23
Move (M) command 5-25
Name (N) command 5-26
Output (0) command 5-29

Index-5
 Procedure (P) command 5-30
Quit (Q) command 5-31
Register (R) command 5-32
Search (S) command 5-35
Starting 5-8
System crash recovery 5-7
Trace (T) command 5-36
Unassemble (U) command 5-38
Write (W) command 5-40
Decimal separator format, setting B-6
DEL 2-36
Delete (D) command (EDLIN) 4-13
DEVICE command B-8
Device drivers
ANSI.SYS B-2
Loading B-1, B-8
VDISK.SYS B-16
Device errors A-2
DIR 2-38
directories 1-7
Disc errors A-2
Discs
Input/Output buffers B-4
Valid drive letters, setting B-12
Virtual B-16
DISKCOMP 2-40
DISKCOPY 2-42
Display
Displaying a message (batch files) 3-12
Extended display control B-2
Turning on and off during batch processing 3-6
DOS
command parts 1-5
Error messages A-1
interface 1-4
internal and external commands 1-15
parts of a command 1-12
prompt and cursor 1-4
running a command 1-17
running commands 1-3
specifying a command name 1-5

Index-6
 specifying devices 1-5
specifying directories 1-7
specifying drives and disks 1-5
specifying files 1-8
specifying paths 1-6
using symbols 1-14
DOS commands
BREAK (configuration file) B-3
BUFFERS (configuration file) B-4
COUNTRY (configuration file) B-6
DEVICE (configuration file) B-8
ECHO (batch files) 3-6
FCBS (configuration file) B-9
FILES (configuration file) B-11
FOR (batch files) 3-8
GOTO (batch files) 3-10
IF (batch files) 3-11
LASTDRIVE (configuration file) B-12
PAUSE (batch files) 3-12
PEMM-SYS (configuration file) B-13
REM (batch files) 3-13
SHELL (configuration file) B-15
SHIFT (batch files) 3-14
DOS2UX 2-48
DOSMOUNT 2-44
Drive letters B-12
Drivers B-2, B-16
Drivers, loading B-8
DSALLOCATE switch (MS-LINK) 6-25
Dump (D) command (DEBUG) 5-14

E
E (end) command (EDLIN) 4-18
E (enter) command (DEBUG) 5-16
ECHO command (batch files) 3-6
Edit command (EDLIN) 4-16
Editing files 4-1
EDLIN
A (append) command 4-9
C (copy) command 4-10
Command options 4-7

Index-7
 Command options 4-7
Command syntax 4-6
D .(delete) command 4-13
Description 4-1
E (end) command 4-18
Edit command 4-16
Entering control characters 4-5
Hints for using 4-5
I (insert) command 4-19
L (list) command 4-21
M (move) command 4-24
P (page) command 4-25
Q (quit) command 4-26
R (replace) command 4-27
S (search) command 4-30
T (transfer) command 4-33
Usage 4:. 3
W (write) command 4-34
End (E) command (EDLIN) 4-18
Enter (E) command (DEBUG) 5-16
ERASE 2-50
Error messages
DEBUG 5-41
DOS A-I
MS-LINK 6-39
EXE2BIN 2-52
EXIT 2-54
extensions
commonly used ones 1-9
reserved 1-9
external commands 1-15
Extra segment 5-6

F
F (fill) command (DEBUG) 5-18
FASTOPEN 2-56
FC 2-58
FCBS command B-9
FDISK 2-62
File control blocks B-9
file names

Index-8
 reserved 1-9
files 1-8
Files
Batch (.BAT) 3-1
Config.sys B-1
Creating 4-1
Editing 4-1
Editing large files 4-9, 4-34
File control blocks (FCB) B-9
File handles B-11
MS-LINK files 6-9
Opening B-11
FILES command B-11
filespec 1-12
Fill (F) command (DEBUG) 5-18
FIND 2-64
FOR command (batch files) 3-8
FOR150 2-70
FORMAT 2-66

G
G (go) command (DEBUG) 5-19
Go (G) command (DEBUG) 5-19
GOTO command (batch files) 3-10
GRAFTABL 2-72
GRAPHICS 2-74
Group 6-4

H
H (hex) command (DEBUG) 5-21
Handles, file B-11
Hex (H) command (DEBUG) 5-21
HIGH switch (MS-LINK) 6-25

I (input) command (DEBUG) 5-22

I (insert) command (EDLIN) 4-19
IF command (batch files) 3-11
Input (I) command (DEBUG) 5-22
Input/output buffers B-4
Insert (I) command (EDLIN) 4-19

Index-9
interface for DOS 1-4
internal commands 1-15
Interrupting command execution B-3
Iterative command execution 3-8

J
JOIN 2-78

K
KEYB 2-80
Keyboards B-2

L
L (list) command (EDLIN) 4-21
L (load) command (DEBUG) 5-23
LABEL 2-84
LASTDRIVE command B-12
Letters, drive B-12
Library files 6-20
LINENUMBERS switch (MS-LINK) 6-26
Linking programs 6- 2
List files 6-19
List (L) command (EDLIN) 4-21
Load (L) command (DEBUG) 5-23

M
M (move) command (DEBUG) 5-25
M (move) command (EDLIN) 4-24
MAP switch (MS-LINK) 6-26
Memory
Addressing 5-6
Offset 5-6
MKDIR 2-86
MODE
communications 2-94
display adapter 2-92
display status 2-106
general information and errors 2-88
parallel printer 2-90
prepare code page 2-98
redirect printing to serial 2-96

Index-10
 reestablish code page 2-104
select code page 2-102
MORE 2-108
Move (M) command (DEBUG) 5-25
Move (M) command (EDLIN) 4-24
MS-DOS
Error messages A-I
MS-LINK
Combination handling 6-6
Command characters 6-21
Definitions 6-4
Description 6-2
Dummy modules 6-8
Error messages 6-39
Examples 6-29
Files used 6-9
Memory requirements 6-2
Optional switches 6-23
Starting 6-11

N
N (name) command (DEBUG) 5-26
Name (N) command (DEBUG) 5-26
NLSFUNC 2-112

o
o (output) command (DEBUG) 5-29
Object modules 6-18
Offset, memory 5-6
options 1-11
Options, EDLIN command 4-7
Output (0) command (DEBUG) 5-29

P
P (page) command (EDLIN) 4-25
P (procedure) command (DEBUG) 5-30
Page (P) command (EDLIN) 4-25
Paragraph 6-5
parameters 1-11
parts of a DOS command 1-5, 1-12
PATH 2-116

Index-11
paths 1-6
PAUSE command (batch files) 3-12
PAUSE switch (MS-LINK) 6-28
PEMM-SYS command B-13
Plus sign 6-21
Positional parameters 3-2, 3-14
PRINT 2-118
Private combinations 6-6
Procedure (P) command (DEBUG) 5-30
Program debugging 5-1
Programs, linking 6-2
PROMPT 2-122
prompt and cursor 1-4
Public combinations 6-6

Q
Q (quit) command (DEBUG) 5-31
Q (quit) command (EDLIN) 4-26
Quit (Q) command (DEBUG) 5-31
Quit (Q) command (EDLIN) 4-26

R
R (register) command (DEBUG) 5-32
R (replace) command (EDLIN) 4-27
RECOVER 2-124'
REDIR 2-128
reference tasks 1-1
Register (R) command (DEBUG) 5-32
relative paths 1-6
REM command (batch files) 3-13
RENAME 2-130
REPLACE 2-132
Replace (R) command (EDLIN) 4-27
Replacing batch file parameters 3-2, 3-4, 3-14
reserved characters 1-8
reserved extensions 1-9
reserved file names 1-9
Response-file method (MS-LINK) 6-15
RESTORE 2-136
RMDIR 2-140
Run files 6-19

Index-12
 running a DOS command 1-17
running DOS commands 1-3

s
S (search) command (DEBUG) 5-35
S (search) command (EDLIN) 4-30
Screen
Displaying a message (batch files) 3-12
Extended screen control B-2
Turning on and off during batch processing 3-6
Search (S) command (DEBUG) 5-35
Search (S) command (EDLIN) 4-30
Segment register 5-6
Segments 5-6, 6-4
SELECT 2-142
Semicolon 6-22
SET 2-144
SHELL command B-15
Shells B-15
SHIFT command (batch files) 3-14
SORT 2-148
specifying
a command name 1-5
devices 1-5
directories 1-7
drives and disks 1-5
paths 1-6
specifying files 1-8
Stack combinations 6-6
Stack segment 5-6
\ STACK switch (MS-LINK) 6-28
SUBST 2-150
switches 1-11
symbols in a DOS command 1-14
SYS 2-152
System crash 5-7
System localization B-6

T
T (trace) command (DEBUG) 5-36
T (transfer) command (EDLIN) 4-33

Index-13
tasks 1-1
Text-prompt method (MS-LINK) 6-13
Time
Format, setting B-6
TIME 2-154
Trace (T) command (DEBUG) 5-36
Transfer (T) command (EDLIN) 4-33
TREE 2-156
TYPE 2-158

u
U (unassemble) command (DEBUG) 5-38
Unassemble (U) command (DEBUG) 5-38
UX2DOS 2-160

V
VDISK.SYS device driver B-16
VER 2-162
VERIFY 2-164
Virtual discs B-16
Virtual memory file (VM.TMP) 6-11
VOL 2-166

w
W (write) command (DEBUG) 5-40
W (write) command (EDLIN) 4-34
wildcard characters 1-10
Write (W) command (DEBUG) 5-40
Write (W) command (EDLIN) 4-34

X
XDIR 2-168

Index-14
 FliOW HEWLETT
a!~ PACKARD

HP Part Number
98870-90050
Microfiche No. 98870-99050 98870-90651
Printed in U.S.A. E0989 For Internal Use Only